Chevrolet | TORRENT - NAVIGATION SYSTEM 2008 | Specifications | Chevrolet TORRENT - NAVIGATION SYSTEM 2008 Specifications

2008 Pontiac Torrent Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats .............................................. 1-10
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-12
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-31
Airbag System
......................................... 1-56
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-71
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-3
Doors and Locks ...................................... 2-11
Windows ................................................. 2-15
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-17
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-20
Mirrors .................................................... 2-37
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-39
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-43
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-48
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-20
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-26
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-45
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-67
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-27
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
All-Wheel Drive
........................................ 5-44
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-46
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-47
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-51
Tires
...................................................... 5-52
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-88
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-98
Electrical System ...................................... 5-99
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-105
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-15
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy
........... 7-17
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, PONTIAC,
the PONTIAC Emblem, and the name TORRENT are
registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time
it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes after
that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada
Limited” for Pontiac Division whenever it appears in this
manual.
1-800-551-4123
www.helminc.com
Propriétaires Canadiens
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
Helm Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
www.helminc.com
This manual describes features that may be available in
this model, but your vehicle may not have all of them.
For example, more than one entertainment system may
be offered or your vehicle may have been ordered
without a front passenger or rear seats.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15860880 A First Printing
ii
©
2007 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Using this Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle to learn
about the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures
and words work together to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the
page number where it can be found.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to
ignore the warning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to help
avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do Not do this”
or “Do Not let this
happen.”
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
You will also find notices in this manual.
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.
The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different
words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Manual Seats ................................................1-2
Seat Height Adjuster .......................................1-3
Power Seat ...................................................1-3
Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-4
Heated Seats .................................................1-4
Manual Reclining Seatbacks .............................1-5
Head Restraints .............................................1-7
Passenger Folding Seatback ............................1-8
Rear Seats .....................................................1-10
Split Folding Rear Seat .................................1-10
Safety Belts ...................................................1-12
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-12
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-17
Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-25
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-30
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-30
Child Restraints .............................................1-31
Older Children ..............................................1-31
Infants and Young Children ............................1-34
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-37
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-40
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) ..................................................1-42
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position ...................................................1-50
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ............................................1-52
Airbag System ...............................................1-56
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-59
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-61
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-62
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-62
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-63
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-64
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-69
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-70
Restraint System Check ..................................1-71
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-71
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-72
1-1
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to unlock
it. Slide the seat to where you want it and release
the bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure
the seat is locked in place.
1-2
Seat Height Adjuster
Power Seat
If your vehicle has a manual driver seat height adjuster,
it is located on the outboard side of the seat near the
front of the seat cushion. To raise the seat, move
the lever upward repeatedly until the seat is at the
desired height. To lower the seat, move the lever
downward repeatedly until the seat is at the desired
height.
If the vehicle has a power seat, the control used to
operate it is located on the outboard side of the driver’s
seat. To adjust the seat do any of the following:
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.
1-3
Manual Lumbar
Heated Seats
If your vehicle has this
feature, the knob is
located on the front of the
driver seat lower cushion
on the inboard side.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the lumbar support.
1-4
If your vehicle has heated
seats, the switches are
located on the instrument
panel near the climate
controls.
The ignition must be on for the heated seats to operate.
Press the switch, nearest to the seat, once to turn
the heated seat on to the high setting. Both indicator
lights will be lit. Press the switch a second time to turn
the heated seat to the low setting. One indicator
light will be lit. Press the switch a third time to turn the
heated seat off.
If your vehicle has remote vehicle start and is started
using the remote keyless entry transmitter, the heated
seats may automatically turn on if it is cold outside. See
“Remote Vehicle Start” under Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on page 2-5. When the key is
inserted into the ignition and the ignition is turned to
RUN, the heated seat feature will turn off. To turn
the heated seats back on, press the desired button.
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Driver’s Seat shown, Passenger Seat similar
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever on the outboard
side of the seat and move the seatback to the desired
position. Then release the lever to lock the seatback
in place. If your front passenger’s seat is a flat folding
seat, you must fully raise the lever to disengage
the seatback.
1-5
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash, the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not
at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-6
Head Restraints
Pull the head restraint up to
raise it. To lower the head
restraint, press the button,
located on the top of the
seatback, and push the
restraint down.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
in a crash.
1-7
Passenger Folding Seatback
The front passenger’s seatback may fold flat.
{CAUTION:
To fold the seatback, do the following:
1. Lower the head restraint all the way.
2. Lift the bar under the front of the seat to unlock it.
Slide the seat as far back as it will go and release
the bar. Try to move the seat back and forth to
make sure it is locked into place.
If you fold the seatback forward to carry longer
objects, such as skis, be sure any such cargo
is not near an airbag. In a crash, an inflating
airbag might force that object toward a person.
This could cause severe injury or even death.
Secure objects away from the area in which an
airbag would inflate. For more information, see
Where Are the Airbags? on page 1-59 and
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22.
{CAUTION:
Things you put on this seatback can strike and
injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a
crash. Remove or secure all items before
driving.
1-8
3. Lift the recliner lever, located on the outboard side
of the seat, up fully and fold the seatback forward
until it disengages.
To raise the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recliner lever, located on the outboard side
of the seat, up fully and push up on the seatback.
2. Continue raising the seatback until the seatback
re-engages.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
4. Continue to fold the seat forward until it locks in the
folded position.
5. Pull up on the seatback to be sure it is locked.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked in place.
The recliner lever is also used to recline the seatback
while a passenger is seated. See Manual Reclining
Seatbacks on page 1-5.
1-9
Rear Seats
{CAUTION:
Split Folding Rear Seat
The rear split bench seatbacks have three available
positions — folded forward, upright, or partially reclined.
Both of the seatbacks can be moved to any of the
three positions independent of the other seatback
position. The rear bench seat can also be moved
forward and rearward.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
1-10
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
To fold the seatback down, do the following:
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1. Ensure all three of the safety belts are unbuckled
and the front seatbacks are not reclined.
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift and hold the lever located on top of the
seatback.
2. Tilt the seatback rearward, then release the lever
when the seatback is in the desired position.
To slide the entire seat forward or rearward, do the
following:
1. Lift and hold the release bar located under the front
of the seat cushion to unlock the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired position.
3. Release the bar.
4. Try to move the seat back and forth to ensure the
seat is locked in place.
2. Lift the lever located on the top of the seatback to
release the seatback.
3. Fold the seatback forward to the desired position.
1-11
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected
from it and be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
1-12
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-28.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the
law requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-13
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
1-14
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-15
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
1-16
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-31
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-34. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you
would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.
1-17
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit snugly against
your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-18
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
lap belt should be worn low and snug on the
hips, just touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give as much
protection this way.
1-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not on the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-20
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be
sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-21
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-22
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you
would not be restrained by the shoulder belt.
Your body could move too far forward
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.
You might also slide under the lap belt. The
belt force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-23
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-24
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in your vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger
belt out all the way, you may engage the child
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let the
belt go back all the way and start again.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-30.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section.
1-25
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
For outboard seating positions, when the safety belt
is not in use, slide the latch plate up the safety
belt webbing. The latch plate should rest on the stitching
on the safety belt, near the guide loop.
Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
1-26
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger.
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although you cannot see them,
they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help
tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crash if the
threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be
away from your face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
To move it up or down,
squeeze the release
buttons (A) together and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-72.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position
in the rear seat. Here is how to install the comfort
guide to the shoulder belt:
After you move the height adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it up or down without squeezing the
release buttons to make sure it has locked into position.
1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on the back
of the seatback.
1-27
2. Place the guide over the belt, and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1-28
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guide. Slide the guide back onto its storage clip
located on the seatback.
1-29
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the extender will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use
it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The
extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for
securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the
regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-30
Child Restraints
Older Children
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
belt until the child passes the below fit test:
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
Belt on page 1-25 for more information. If the
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
1-31
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It
should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-25.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-32
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt cannot properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. In a crash, the child would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The
child might slide under the lap belt. The belt
force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The child could also move too far
forward increasing the chance of head and
neck injury. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
1-33
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Children who are not restrained properly
can strike other people, or can be thrown out of
the vehicle. In addition, young children should not use
the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone; they need to use a
child restraint.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if
a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never
leave children unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the safety belts.
1-34
People should never hold an infant in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. An infant does
not weigh much — until a crash. During a
crash an infant will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it. For example, in a crash at
only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant
will suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
CAUTION:
(Continued)
1-35
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-36
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
should always be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
1-37
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-38
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-42 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Because there are different
systems, it is important to refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint. Make
sure the child is properly secured, following
the instructions that came with that restraint.
1-39
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-64
for additional information.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, we
recommend that rear-facing child restraints not be
transported in your vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
1-40
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
If you need to secure more than one child restraint in
the rear seat, review the following illustrations.
Depending on where you place the child restraint or the
size of the child restraint, you may not be able to
access certain safety belt assemblies or LATCH anchors
for additional passengers or child restraints.
Configurations for Use of Child
Restraints
A. Child restraint using
LATCH
B. Occupant prohibited
A. Occupant prohibited
B. Child restraint using
LATCH
A. Child restraint using
LATCH
B. Occupant prohibited
C. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
A. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
1-41
A. Child restraint or
occupant using safety
belt
B. Child restraint using
LATCH
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on
the child restraint that are made for use with the
LATCH system.
1-42
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
1-43
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint.
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Rear Seat
Each rear seating position has exposed metal anchors
located in the crease between the seatback and the
seat cushion.
1-44
The top tether anchors for each rear seating position
are located on the back of the rear seatback. You may
need to adjust the rear compartment storage panel/
cover in the rear cargo area to access the anchors. Be
sure to use an anchor located on the same side of
the vehicle as the seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-40 for additional
information.
1-45
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure
that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly
installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the
vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
CAUTION:
1-46
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten.
Secure any unused safety belts behind the
child restraint so children cannot reach them.
Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has
one, after the child restraint has been installed.
Be sure to follow the instructions of the child
restraint manufacturer.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint LATCH
attachment parts and the vehicle’s safety belt
assembly may cause damage to these parts. Make
sure when securing unused safety belts behind
the child restraint that there is no contact between
the child restraint LATCH attachment parts and
the vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts
secured may cause damage to the safety belt or the
seat. When removing the child restraint, always
remember to return the safety belts to their normal,
stowed position before folding the rear seat.
A. Passenger’s Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors
B. Center Rear Seat Lower Anchors
C. Driver’s Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors
Make sure to attach the child restraint at the proper
anchor location.
1-47
This system is designed to make installation of child
restraints easier. When using lower anchors, do not use
the vehicle’s safety belts. Instead use the vehicle’s
anchors and child restraint attachments to secure the
restraints. Some restraints also use another vehicle
anchor to secure a top tether.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1-48
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. You may need to adjust the rear
compartment storage panel/cover in the rear
cargo area to access the anchors. See
Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover on
page 2-45.
2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
around the headrest or
head restraint.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, raise the
headrest or head restraint
and route the tether
under the headrest or head
restraint and in between
the headrest or head
restraint posts.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-49
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 1-42 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-42 for top
tether anchor locations.
If you need to install more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint
on page 1-40.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1-50
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-42 for
more information.
1-51
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tether
is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 1-40.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions. See
Passenger Sensing System on page 1-64 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-30 for
more information on this, including important safety
information.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-64
for additional information.
1-52
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, we
recommend that rear-facing child restraints not be
transported in your vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 1-42 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-42 for top
tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the
vehicle. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 3-30.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
1-53
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-54
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. If your vehicle does not have a rear seat and your
child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-42 for more
information.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat
massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer/retailer. If no rear seat is
available, do not install a child restraint in this vehicle
and check with your dealer/retailer.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tether
is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
1-55
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
Your vehicle may have the following airbags:
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind that
passenger.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
Even if you do not have a right front passenger seat in
your vehicle there is still an active frontal airbag in
the right side of the instrument panel. Do not place cargo
in front of this airbag.
1-56
{CAUTION:
Be sure that cargo is not near an airbag. In a
crash, an inflating airbag might force that
object toward a person. This could cause
severe injury or even death. Secure objects
away from the area in which an airbag would
inflate. For more information, see Where Are
the Airbags? on page 1-59 and Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-22.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts, but do not
replace them.
{CAUTION:
Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.
If your vehicle has rollover capable roof-rail
airbags, they are designed to inflate in
moderate to severe crashes where something
hits the side of your vehicle and in the event of
a vehicle rollover. They are not designed to
inflate in frontal or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
1-57
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it inflates can
be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit
unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you
would be if you were sitting on the edge of
your seat or leaning forward. Safety belts help
keep you in position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle. To read how, see
Older Children on page 1-31 or Infants and
Young Children on page 1-34.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions
with roof-rail airbags.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-29
for more information.
1-58
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the steering
wheel.
1-59
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or
it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do
not put anything between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put anything on
the steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right
front passenger, and second row outboard passengers,
they are in the ceiling above the side windows.
1-60
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by
routing the rope or tie down through any door
or window opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Your vehicle may or may not have roof-rail airbags.
See Airbag System on page 1-56. Roof-rail airbags are
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.
In addition, these roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate
during a rollover. Roof-rail airbags will inflate if the
crash severity is above the system’s designed threshold
level. The threshold level can vary with specific
vehicle design.
1-61
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal
impacts, near-frontal impacts, or rear impacts. Both
roof-rail airbags will deploy when either side of
the vehicle is struck or if the sensing system predicts
that the vehicle is about to roll over.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags,
deployment is determined by the location and severity of
the side impact. In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag
deployment is determined by the direction of the roll.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from
the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing
the bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The
inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part of
the airbag module.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
roof-rail airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling
of the vehicle, near the side windows that have
occupant seating positions.
1-62
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags
distribute the force of the impact more evenly over
the occupant’s upper body.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help
contain the head and chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the first and second rows.
The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to
help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover
events, although no system can prevent all such
ejections.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
Inflate? on page 1-61 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not even realize an
airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after they deploy. Some
components of the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the airbag modules, see
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-62.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in
the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of asthma or
other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone
in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing problems
but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window
or a door. If you experience breathing problems
following an airbag deployment, you should
seek medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn
the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off,
and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
1-63
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger’s position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible on the instrument
panel when you start your vehicle.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 7-17 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-18.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the word ON or the
word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off, will
be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 3-30.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbags are not part of the passenger
sensing system.
1-64
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, we
recommend that rear-facing child restraints not be
transported in your vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
(Continued)
1-65
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
1-66
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-30.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator
is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer
to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 1-52.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 1-7.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle, and
check with your dealer/retailer. If no rear seat is
available, do not install a child restraint in this vehicle,
and check with your dealer/retailer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s
seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If
this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any additional
material from the seat, such as blankets, cushions,
seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers and ask
the person to place the seatback in the fully upright
position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes. This will allow the
system to detect that person and then enable the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
1-67
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-29 for more on this, including
important safety information.
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
1-68
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment other than any that GM has
approved for your specific vehicle. See Adding
Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 1-70 for more information about modifications that
can affect how the system operates.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about servicing your vehicle
and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-16.
1-69
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts of
the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel,
roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner or pillar
garnish trim, overhead console, front sensors, side
impact sensors, rollover sensor module, or airbag
wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger’s position,
which includes sensors that are part of the
passenger’s seat. The passenger sensing system
may not operate properly if the original seat
trim is replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery or
trim, or with GM covers, upholstery or trim
designed for a different vehicle. Any object, such as
an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing
pad or device, installed under or on top of the
1-70
seat fabric, could also interfere with the operation of
the passenger sensing system. This could either
prevent proper deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system
from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s).
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-64.
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
If your vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see
Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 5-72
for additional important information.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag sensors,
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
Restraint System Check
Airbags
Checking the Restraint Systems
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-29 for more information.
Safety Belts
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn or
frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do
not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are
any opened or broken airbag covers, have the
airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. For
the location of the airbag modules, see What
Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-62. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See
Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-28 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 5-92.
1-71
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the belt assemblies that were used during any crash
may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have your safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
If your vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being used
at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your
vehicle has been in a crash, if your airbag readiness
light stays on after you start your vehicle, or while you
are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-29.
1-72
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................2-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation ...................................................2-5
Remote Vehicle Start ......................................2-8
Doors and Locks ............................................2-11
Door Locks ..................................................2-11
Power Door Locks ........................................2-11
Delayed Locking ...........................................2-12
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-12
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-12
Lockout Protection ........................................2-13
Liftgate ........................................................2-13
Windows ........................................................2-15
Power Windows ............................................2-16
Sun Visors ...................................................2-17
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-17
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-18
PASS-Key® III+ ............................................2-18
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ..............................2-19
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-20
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-20
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-21
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-22
Starting the Engine .......................................2-22
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-23
Automatic Transmission Operation
(3.4L V6 with 5-Speed) ..............................2-25
Automatic Transmission Operation
(3.6L V6 with 6-Speed) ..............................2-28
Parking Brake ..............................................2-32
Shifting Into PARK (P) ...................................2-33
Shifting Out of PARK (P) ...............................2-35
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-35
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-36
Running the Engine While Parked ...................2-36
Mirrors ...........................................................2-37
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-37
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ..............2-37
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® ............................................2-38
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-38
Outside Convex Mirrors .................................2-39
2-1
Section 2
Features and Controls
OnStar® System .............................................2-39
Storage Areas ................................................2-43
Glove Box ...................................................2-43
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-43
Center Console Storage .................................2-43
2-2
Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-43
Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover ..........2-45
Rear Seat Armrest ........................................2-46
Table ..........................................................2-47
Convenience Net ..........................................2-48
Sunroof .........................................................2-48
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
The key can be used for the ignition and all locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys.
Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-7 for more information.
2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system, it operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry Canada.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter does not
work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle
for the transmitter to work, try this:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-4
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” later in this
section.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retailer
or a qualified technician for service.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
The vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlocked from
about 3 feet (1 m) up to 65 feet (20 m) away with
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature you can also
start your vehicle with the RKE transmitter. Your RKE
transmitter, with the remote start button, provides
an increased range of 195 feet (60 m) away. However,
the range may be less while the vehicle is running.
As a result, you may need to be closer to your vehicle
to turn it off than you were to turn it on.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2-4.
With Remote Start
Shown, Without Remote
Start Similar
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has this
feature, press / to start the engine from outside the
vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote
Vehicle Start on page 2-8 for additional information.
2-5
Q (Lock): Press Q to lock the doors and liftgate. If
enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the
parking lamps will flash once to indicate locking has
occurred. If enabled through the DIC, the horn will chirp
when Q is pressed again within five seconds of the
previous press of the lock button. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-60 for additional information.
Pressing Q may arm the content theft-deterrent
system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-18.
K (Unlock):
Press K to unlock the driver’s door. If K
is pressed again within five seconds, all remaining
doors, and the liftgate, will unlock. The interior lamps
will come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until
the ignition is turned on. If enabled through the DIC,
the parking lamps will flash twice to indicate unlocking
has occurred. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 3-60. Pressing K on the RKE transmitter
will disarm the content theft-deterrent system. See
Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-18.
2-6
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
L to locate your vehicle. The turn signal lamps will
flash and the horn will sound three times.
Press and hold L for more than two seconds to
activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps will flash
and the horn will sound repeatedly for 30 seconds.
The alarm will turn off when the ignition is moved
to ON/RUN or L is pressed again. The ignition must
be in LOCK/OFF for the panic alarm to work.
The RKE transmitter is used to arm/disarm the content
theft-deterrent system. Your vehicle’s theft-deterrent
system can be programmed to three different modes.
See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-18.
If you accidentally set off the alarm when entering or
exiting the vehicle, you can shut it off by pressing Q or
K once or L twice.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter
is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased
through your dealer/retailer. All transmitters need to be
re-coded to match the new transmitter. The lost
transmitter will no longer work after the new transmitters
are re-coded. The vehicle can have a maximum of
four transmitters matched to it. Or, see “Learn Remote
Key” under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-45
for instructions on how to match RKE transmitters
to your vehicle.
Battery Replacement
The battery is weak if the transmitter will not work at the
normal range in any location. If you have to get close
to your vehicle before the transmitter works, change the
battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter:
1. Separate the halves of the transmitter with a flat,
thin object inserted into the notch on the side.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Put the transmitter back together tightly.
2-7
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have the remote start feature. This
feature allows you to start the engine from outside
the vehicle. See “REMOTE START” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-60 for instructions on how
to enable and disable this feature.
During a remote start, the climate control system will
turn on at the fan, temperature, and mode settings the
vehicle was set to when the vehicle was last turned
off. The rear window defogger will also turn on.
If your vehicle has heated seats, they may turn on
during colder outside temperatures and will shut
off when the key is turned to ON/RUN. You may not
notice an increase in seat surface temperature until the
seat is occupied for a short period of time.
Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require
a person using remote start to have the vehicle in view
when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): This button will be on the
RKE transmitter if you have remote start.
2-8
Your RKE transmitter, with the remote start button,
provides an increased range of operation. However, the
range may be less while the vehicle is running. As a
result, you may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn
it off, than you were to turn it on.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, do not use the remote
start feature. The vehicle may run out of fuel.
To start the engine using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the RKE transmitter, that has a remote vehicle
start button, at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button,
then immediately press and hold the remote
vehicle start button. Hold the remote start button
until the vehicle’s turn signal lamps flash, or
for at least four seconds if the vehicle’s lights are
not visible. The vehicle’s doors will be locked.
Pressing the remote start button again after the
vehicle has started will turn off the ignition.
When the vehicle’s engine starts, the parking lamps
will turn on and remain on while the engine is
running.
3. To extend the engine run time by 10 minutes,
repeat Steps 1 and 2 while the engine is still
running. The engine run time can only be extended
if it is the first remote start since the vehicle has
been driven. Remote start can be extended
one time.
If the remote start procedure is used again before
the first 10 minute time frame has ended, the
first 10 minutes will immediately expire and the
second 10 minute time frame will start.
For example, if the lock button and then the remote
start buttons are pressed again after the vehicle
has been running for five minutes, 10 minutes are
added, allowing the engine to run for 15 minutes.
4. After entering the vehicle during a remote start,
insert and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the
vehicle.
After a remote start, the engine will automatically
shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension
has been done or the vehicle’s key is inserted into
the ignition switch and turned to ON/RUN.
A maximum of two remote starts or remote start
attempts are allowed between ignition cycles.
After your vehicle’s engine has been started two times
using the remote start button, the vehicle’s ignition
switch must be turned to ON/RUN and then back to
LOCK/OFF using the key before the remote start
procedure can be used again.
To manually shut off the engine after a remote start, do
any of the following:
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
the remote start button until the parking lamps
turn off.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Insert the vehicle’s key into the ignition switch and
turn the switch to ON/RUN and then back to
LOCK/OFF.
2-9
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if any
of the following occur:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.
The vehicle’s hood, liftgate or doors are not closed.
The hazard warning flashers are on.
There is an emission control system malfunction.
The engine coolant temperature is too high.
The oil pressure is low.
Two remote vehicle starts have already been used.
The maximum number of remote starts or remote
start attempts between ignition cycles with the key
is two.
• The remote start feature may be disabled. The
system may be enabled or disabled through
the DIC. See “REMOTE START” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-60 for additional
information.
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature
are shipped from the factory with the remote
vehicle start system enabled.
2-10
Remote Start Ready
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start
feature, it may have the remote start ready feature.
This feature allows your dealer/retailer to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature.
If your vehicle has the remote start ready feature, your
RKE transmitter will have extended range that will
allow you to lock or unlock your vehicle from
approximately 195 feet (60 m) away.
See your dealer/retailer if you would like to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to your
vehicle.
Doors and Locks
There are a couple of ways to manually lock or unlock
your vehicle.
Door Locks
From the outside, use the key in the driver’s door.
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance
of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
From the inside, use the lock control on the door.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are located on the
driver’s and front passenger’s doors.
K (Unlock):
To unlock the doors, press the unlock
symbol.
Q (Lock):
Remove the ignition key and press the lock
symbol to lock all of the doors.
2-11
Delayed Locking
Rear Door Security Locks
A chime will sound three times to indicate a door or
liftgate is open when you try to lock the doors with the
power door lock switch. The doors will not lock, and the
theft-deterrent system will not arm until all the doors
are closed and ten seconds have passed.
Your vehicle has rear door security locks that prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each
rear door. You must
open the rear doors to
access them.
The delayed locking feature can be programmed
through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 3-60.
See also Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2-5.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Your vehicle has an automatic lock/unlock feature which
enables you to program the power door locks through
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-60 for more information
on DIC programming.
To set the security locks, do the following:
1. Insert the key into the lock above the rear door
security lock label and turn it to the horizontal
position.
2. Close the door.
3. Repeat the steps for the other rear door.
2-12
To open a rear door while the security lock is on, do the
following:
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, the front door power lock switch, or
the rear door manual lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the slot next to the rear door
security lock label and turn it to the vertical
position.
3. Repeat the steps for the other lock.
Lockout Protection
If you press the power door lock switch when the key is
in the ignition and any door is open, all the doors will
lock and only the driver’s door will unlock. Be sure
to remove the key from the ignition when locking your
vehicle.
If the keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the doors
and the key is in the ignition, a chime will sound
three times. All passenger doors will lock, but the
driver’s door will remain unlocked.
Liftgate
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate or
liftglass open because carbon monoxide (CO)
gas can come into your vehicle. You cannot see
or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the liftgate
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate or liftglass:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your climate control system
to its highest speed and select the control
setting that will force outside air into your
vehicle. See “Climate Control System” in
the Index.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-36.
To unlock the liftgate, press the unlock button on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice or use the
power door lock switch.
2-13
To lock the liftgate, press the lock button on the RKE
transmitter or use the power door lock switch. The
liftgate does not have a key lock cylinder.
To open the liftgate, press the touchpad centered on
the underside of the liftgate handle and pull up.
Use a tool to push the
service release lever
located on the latch until
you hear or feel the
gate release.
When closing the liftgate, use the molded handles to
pull the liftgate down. Push the liftgate closed until
it latches.
Liftgate Operation with Loss of Power
The liftgate is equipped with an electric latch. If the
battery is disconnected or has low voltage, the liftgate
will not open.
To open the liftgate if this
happens, remove the
interior trim plug located at
the base of the liftgate
from inside the vehicle.
2-14
The liftgate can now be opened and closed manually.
You will need to use this procedure to open the
liftgate until the power is restored.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-15
Power Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome from extreme heat in
warm or hot weather and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave keys in a vehicle with
children.
When there are children in the rear seat use
the window lockout button to prevent
unintentional operation of the windows.
2-16
The window switches for all doors are located on the
center console. A window switch for each rear window is
located on each rear door.
To open a window, press the bottom of the switch. To
close a window, press the top of the switch.
The power windows operate when the ignition is RUN
or ACC (Accessory), or while in Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 2-22.
Express-Down Window
Sun Visors
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature that allows the window to be lowered without
holding the switch. Press the bottom of the switch part
way, and the driver’s window will open a small
amount. Press the switch down all the way down and
release it and the window will go down automatically.
To block out glare, swing the sun visor down. You can
also detach the driver’s sun visor from the center
mount and slide it along the rod from side-to-side for
greater coverage.
To stop the window while it is lowering, press and
release the top of the switch.
Your vehicle has covered visor vanity mirrors on both
the driver’s and passenger’s side.
Window Lockout
o (Window Lockout):
Your vehicle has a lockout
feature to prevent rear seat passengers from operating
the windows. Press the lockout button, located with
the power window switches, to turn the feature on and
off. The window switch has a light that will come on
when the switch is active.
Visor Vanity Mirrors
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
2-17
Content Theft-Deterrent
To disarm the theft-deterrent system, do one of the
following:
Your vehicle has a content theft-deterrent alarm system.
1. Unlock the doors with the RKE transmitter.
To activate the theft-deterrent system:
2. Insert the key in the ignition and turn it from the
LOCK/OFF position.
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. If
you are using the RKE transmitter, the door does
not need to be open.
3. Close all doors.
The key must be removed from the ignition to arm
the system.
If the theft-deterrent system is activated and a door or the
liftgate is opened without using the RKE transmitter, a
10 second pre-alarm will occur, and the security light will
flash. The horn will sound rapidly for 10 seconds. If you
do not press unlock on the RKE transmitter or insert the
key in the ignition and turn if from the LOCK/OFF
position, the alarm will go off. The horn will sound and the
headlamps will flash for 30 seconds.
After the alarm has sounded for 30 seconds, the system
will re-arm itself automatically.
2-18
PASS-Key® III+
The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
PASS-Key® III+ Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the key
is removed from the ignition.
The system is automatically disarmed when the key is
turned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or START
from the LOCK/OFF position.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
If the engine does not start and the security light on the
instrument panel comes on when trying to start the
vehicle, there may be a problem with your theft-deterrent
system. Turn the ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-99. If the engine still
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be
faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service the
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. In an
emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to “learn”
the transponder value of a new or replacement key.
Up to nine additional keys may be programmed for the
vehicle. The following procedure is for programming
additional keys only. If all the currently programmed
keys are lost or do not operate, you must see your
dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have keys made and programmed to
the system.
2-19
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
To program the new additional key:
1. Verify that the new key has a
1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in the
ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not
start, see your dealer/retailer for service.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to
the ON/RUN position within five seconds of
removing the original key.
The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, see
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
2-20
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
a Trailer on page 4-32 for the trailer towing
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
Ignition Positions
9 (LOCK/OFF):
You will only be able to remove your
key when the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF.
With the key in the ignition
switch, you can turn it to
four different positions.
A warning tone will sound
if you open the driver’s
door when the key has not
been removed from the
ignition.
In order to shift out of PARK (P), ignition must be in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake
pedal must be applied.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is in all the way. If
none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.
The ignition switch cannot be turned to LOCK/OFF
unless the shift lever is in PARK (P).
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position operates
some of your electrical accessories.
R (ON/RUN):
This is the position the switch returns to
after you start your engine and release the switch.
The switch stays in the ON/RUN position when
the engine is running. But even when the engine is not
running, you can use ON/RUN to operate your
electrical accessories and to display some warning and
indicator lights.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the
engine off. You may not be able to start your vehicle if
the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period
of time.
/ (START): This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will
return to ON/RUN for normal driving.
2-21
Key In the Ignition
Starting the Engine
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it is an
easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you leave the
key in the ignition and park your vehicle, a chime
will sound, when you open the driver’s door. Always
remember to remove your key from the ignition and take
it with you. This will lock your ignition and transmission.
Also, always remember to lock the doors.
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position – this is a
safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ignition while your vehicle is parked. You may not be
able to start your vehicle after it has been parked for an
extended period of time.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
• Audio System
• Power Windows
• Sunroof (if equipped)
Power to these accessories will continue to operate for
up to 10 minutes or until the driver’s door is opened.
All these features will work when the key is in ON/RUN
or ACC/ACCESSORY.
2-22
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and
transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up
and lubricate all moving parts.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is turned
to the START position, and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.
If the engine does not start and the key is held in
START for many seconds, cranking will be stopped
after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage.
To prevent gear damage, this system also prevents
cranking if the engine is already running. Engine
cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition
switch to the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF
position.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and holding it there as you hold the key in START for
up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking
motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of
the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly
but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up
and lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, your
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater, if available, can help in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C) for easier
starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours before
starting your vehicle. An internal thermostat in the
plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent engine
coolant heater operation at temperatures.
2-23
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
cord is located on the passenger’s side of the
engine compartment, near the radiator.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
2-24
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer/retailer in the area where you will be
parking your vehicle. The dealer/retailer can give you
the best advice for that particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation
(3.4L V6 with 5-Speed)
The shift lever is located on the center console. When
you change gears, the different shift positions will display
on the instrument panel cluster.
There are several different positions for the automatic
transmission.
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See Shifting Into PARK (P) on
page 2-33. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-32.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system.
2-25
You must fully apply your regular brakes first and then
press the shift lever button before you can shift from
PARK (P) when the ignition key is in ON/RUN. If you
cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift
lever and push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as
you maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever
button and move the shift lever into another gear. See
Shifting Out of PARK (P) on page 2-35.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging your transmission,
see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow
on page 4-21.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
2-26
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
Notice: Shifting to a drive gear from NEUTRAL (N)
while the vehicle is moving could damage the
transmission. Make sure the vehicle is stopped
before shifting from NEUTRAL (N) into a drive gear.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving with the
automatic transmission. It provides the best fuel
economy for your vehicle. If you need more power for
passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator all the way down.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of
Control on page 4-12.
INTERMEDIATE (I): This position is also used for
normal driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed without
using your brakes for slight downgrades where the
vehicle would otherwise accelerate due to steepness of
grade. If constant upshifting or downshifting occurs while
driving up steep hills, this position can be used to prevent
repetitive types of shifts. You might choose
INTERMEDIATE (I) instead of DRIVE (D) when driving
on hilly, winding roads and when towing a trailer, so that
there is less shifting between gears.
LOW (L): This position reduces vehicle speed more
than INTERMEDIATE (I) without actually using
your brakes. You can use it on very steep hills, or in
deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in LOW (L),
the transmission will not shift into LOW (L) until the
vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by your warranty. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Transmission Overheating
If the transmission fluid temperature rises above
284°F (140°C) or rises rapidly, the Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning Light will flash. See Engine
Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 3-35 for
more information. When the transmission overheats
it will go into a protection mode and will default shift into
fifth gear if in the DRIVE (D) position, or second gear
if in the LOW (L) position. Continue driving the vehicle in
either position depending on the required vehicle
speed and load. Once the fluid temperature lowers to
the normal temperature range, the transmission will
return to the normal shift patterns. Towing or driving on
long hills can cause the transmission fluid temperature
to be higher than normal. If the transmission fluid
temperature will not cool, you may need to pull over and
check the transmission fluid level. You should also
check the engine coolant temperature. If it is hot, see
Engine Overheating on page 5-25.
2-27
Automatic Transmission Operation
(3.6L V6 with 6-Speed)
The shift lever for the automatic transmission is located
on the console between the seats.
Maximum engine speed is limited when the vehicle is in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) to protect driveline
components from improper operation.
There are several different positions for the shift lever.
When using the Manual Shift Mode (MSM), a number
indicating the gear selected will appear on the
instrument cluster below the shift position display. For
more information on the manual shift option see “Manual
Shift Mode” in this section.
2-28
PARK (P): This position locks the front wheels. It is the
best position to use when the engine is started
because the vehicle cannot move easily.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See Shifting Into PARK (P) on
page 2-33. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-32.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system.
You must fully apply your regular brakes first and then
press the shift lever button, before you can shift
from PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN. If you
cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift
lever and push the shift lever all way into PARK (P)
as you maintain brake application. Then press the shift
lever button and move the shift lever into another
gear. See Shifting Out of PARK (P) on page 2-35.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission,
see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow
on page 4-21.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when the vehicle is
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
2-29
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. It
provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. If the
vehicle needs more power for passing, and it is:
Manual Shift Mode (MSM) (Automatic
Transmission)
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down.
The vehicle will shift down to the next gear and
have more power.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see Skidding under Loss of
Control on page 4-12.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by your warranty. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
MANUAL SHIFT MODE (M): This position, available on
the models with the Manual Shift Mode (MSM), allows
you to change gears similar to a manual transmission.
If your vehicle has this feature, see “Manual Shift
Mode (MSM)”.
2-30
To use this feature, do the following:
1. Move the shift lever from DRIVE (D) to the left into
the manual gate.
While driving in manual shift mode, the transmission
will remain in the driver gear selected. When
coming to a stop in the manual position, the vehicle
will automatically shift to FIRST (1) gear.
2. Push the shift lever forward toward the plus (+) to
upshift or rearward toward the minus (−) to
downshift.
When using the Manual Shift Mode (MSM) the
number of the gear selected will appear on
the instrument cluster below the shift position
display.
In manual shift mode all six forward gears can be
selected.
While using the MSM feature the vehicle will have
operation similar to a manual transmission. You can use
this for sport driving or when driving hilly roads to
stay in gear longer or to downshift for more power or
engine braking.
The transmission will only allow you to shift into gears
appropriate for the vehicle speed:
• The transmission will not automatically shift to the
next higher gear without moving the shift lever.
• The transmission will not allow shifting to the next
lower gear if the vehicle speed is too high.
Transmission Overheating
If the transmission fluid temperature rises above
270°F (132°C) or rises rapidly, the Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning Light will flash. See Engine
Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 3-35 for
more information. When the transmission overheats
it will go into a protection mode and will default into a
different shift sequence to help cool the transmission
fluid. This shift sequence is the same for both DRIVE (D)
position and manual mode. Continue driving the
vehicle in either position depending on the required
vehicle speed and load. Once the fluid temperature
lowers to the normal temperature range, the
transmission will return to the normal shift patterns.
Towing or driving on long hills can cause the
transmission fluid temperature to be higher than normal.
If the transmission fluid temperature will not cool, you
may need to pull over and check the transmission
fluid level. You should also check the engine coolant
temperature. If it is hot, see Engine Overheating
on page 5-25.
If the vehicle does not respond to a gear change, or
detects a problem with the transmission, the range
of gears may be reduced and the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp will come on. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-36.
2-31
SECOND (2) and THIRD (3) Gear Start
Feature
Parking Brake
When accelerating your vehicle from a stop in snowy
and icy conditions, you may want to select SECOND (2)
and THIRD (3) gear. A higher gear, and light application
of the gas pedal, may allow you to gain more traction
on slippery surfaces.
With the Manual Shift Mode, the vehicle can accelerate
from a stop in SECOND (2) or THIRD (3).
1. Move the shift lever from DRIVE (D) into the
manual gate.
2. With the vehicle stopped, move the shift lever
forward to select SECOND (2) or THIRD (3).
The vehicle will start from a stop position in
SECOND (2) or THIRD (3).
3. Once the vehicle is moving select the desired drive
gear or move the shift lever to the DRIVE (D)
position.
2-32
The parking brake lever is located to the right of the
driver’s seat.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition is
on, the brake system warning light will come on.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press
the release button. Hold the release button in as you
move the brake lever all the way down.
Make sure to release the parking brake before driving
the vehicle.
If the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving
at least 4 mph (6 km/h), a chime will activate to
remind you to release the parking brake.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
Shifting Into PARK (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-32.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your foot and set
the parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-32
for more information.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing the
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all
the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the key, your vehicle is in
PARK (P).
2-33
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pressing
the button on the console shift lever. If you can, it
means that the shift lever was not fully locked into
PARK (P).
2-34
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque
lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting
Into PARK (P) on page 2-33.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift
lever is in PARK (P) with the shift lever button fully
released, and
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of
PARK (P), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is
applied.
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery
with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on page 5-38 for more
information.
To shift out of PARK (P) use the following:
If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever button again.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK (P),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
Parking Over Things That Burn
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Then press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
2-35
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• The exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your
vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-36
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-36.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
Winter Driving on page 4-18.
Mirrors
{CAUTION:
Manual Rearview Mirror
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set the
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into PARK (P) on page 2-33.
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a trailer,
also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-32.
When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position,
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your
vehicle. Hold the mirror in the center to move it up or
down and side to side. The day/night adjustment allows
you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the lamps
behind you. Push the tab forward for daytime use
and pull it for nighttime use.
Manual Rearview Mirror with
OnStar®
To adjust the angle of the mirror, move the mirror to a
position that allows you see to out of the back window.
To adjust the height of the mirror, adjust the arm
that connects the mirror to the windshield.
To reduce glare from lights behind you, move the lever
toward you to the night position.
There are also OnStar® buttons located at the bottom of
the mirror face. See your dealer for more information
on the system and how to subscribe to OnStar®.
See OnStar® System on page 2-39 for more information
about the services OnStar® provides.
2-37
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside
rearview mirror with OnStar® controls. For more
information about OnStar®, see OnStar® System on
page 2-39.
Outside Power Mirrors
The controls for the power
mirrors are located on the
instrument panel.
O (On/Off):
The on/off button, located on the lower left
side of the mirror, is used for the automatic dimming
functions of the rearview mirror.
Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming feature comes on each time the
vehicle is started. Automatic dimming reduces the
glare of lights from behind the vehicle.
To turn the automatic dimming feature on or off, press
and release the AUTO/( (off) button. The indicator light
will come on when this feature is on.
To adjust the mirrors, do the following:
1. Move the selector switch to the left or right to
choose the driver’s or passenger’s mirror.
2. Press the corresponding edges of the round control
pad to move each mirror to the desired direction.
Adjust each outside mirror so that you can see a little of
your vehicle, and the area behind your vehicle.
2-38
Both mirrors can manually be folded by pulling them
toward the vehicle. This feature may be useful
when going through a car wash or a confined space.
Push the mirrors away from the vehicle, to the normal
position, before driving.
OnStar® System
Outside Convex Mirrors
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved, creating a wider area of vision
for the driver.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information, and convenience services. If your
airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an
automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can
request emergency services be sent to your location.
If you lock your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock
your doors. If you need roadside assistance, press
the OnStar button and they can contact Roadside
Service for you.
2-39
OnStar service is provided to you subject to the OnStar
Terms and Conditions. You may cancel your OnStar
service at any time by contacting OnStar. A complete
OnStar Owner’s Guide and the OnStar Terms and
Conditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar
Subscriber glove box literature. For more information,
visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or TTY
1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar button to speak
with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles.
To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the
services described below, or for a full description of
OnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar.com.
OnStar Services
For new vehicles with OnStar, the Safe & Sound Plan,
or the Directions & Connections Plan is included for
one year from the date of purchase. You can extend this
plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the Directions
& Connections Plan. For more information, press
the OnStar button to speak with an advisor. Some
OnStar services (such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance) may not be available
until you register with OnStar.
2-40
Available Services with Safe & Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Link to Emergency Services
Roadside Assistance
Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
AccidentAssist
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics
GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 complimentary
minutes
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Available Services included with Directions
& Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Hands-Free Calling may also
be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S.
or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with an
OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
OnStar Virtual Advisor
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and
stock quotes. By pressing the phone button and giving
a few simple voice commands, you can browse
through the various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s
Guide for more information (Only available in the
continental U.S.).
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be
used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-110 for
more information.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the button for
a few seconds and give the command “ONSTAR” to
activate the OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
2-41
How OnStar Service Works
Your vehicle’s OnStar system has the capability of
recording and transmitting vehicle information. This
information is automatically sent to an OnStar Call
Center at the time of an OnStar button press,
Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN
system deploys. The vehicle information usually includes
your GPS location and, in the event of a crash,
additional information regarding the accident that your
vehicle has been involved in (e.g. the direction from
which your vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual
Advisor feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling, your
vehicle also sends OnStar your GPS location so that we
can provide you with location-based services.
OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar
service also cannot work unless you are in a place
where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for
that area has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that is
compatible with the OnStar service. Not all services are
available everywhere, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas, or at all times.
2-42
Location information about your vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
Your vehicle must have a working electrical system
(including adequate battery power) for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service to you at any particular time or place.
Some examples are damage to important parts of your
vehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
weather or wireless phone network congestion.
Your Responsibility
Increase the radio volume if you cannot hear the OnStar
advisor. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red,
this means that your system is not functioning properly
and should be checked by your dealer/retailer. If the
light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar
subscription has expired. You can always press the
OnStar button to confirm that your OnStar equipment
is active.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open the glove box, pull the handle to the left and
pull the glove box door down until it stops and is
fully open.
Cupholder(s)
There are two cupholders located at the lower front of
the center console armrest and a molded cupholder
on the floor of the center console. To use the cupholders
on the armrest, pull the tray forward. There are two
cupholders located at the rear of the center console.
Pull downward on the lid to use the cupholders.
Center Console Storage
Your vehicle has a center console armrest with storage
area. Use the lever on the front of the console to
open it.
Luggage Carrier
{CAUTION:
If you try to carry something on top of your
vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
carrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattress
and so forth — the wind can catch it as you
drive along. This can cause you to lose
control. What you are carrying could be
violently torn off, and this could cause you or
other drivers to have a collision, and of course
damage your vehicle. You may be able to carry
something like this inside. But, never carry
something longer or wider than the luggage
carrier on top of your vehicle.
If equipped, a luggage carrier allows you to load things
on top of your vehicle. The luggage carrier has side
rails attached to the roof, sliding crossrails, if the vehicle
has them, and places to use for tying things down.
These let you load some things on top of your vehicle,
as long as they are not wider or longer than the
luggage carrier.
2-43
The roof rack crossrails lock along the straight section
of the side rail.
Do not stand on the plastic lower body panels when
loading cargo on the luggage carrier.
Press the levers down until the locking mechanisms
fully engage to the side rail. Make sure each lever is in
the down position. The crossrail will not slide when
properly engaged.
Loading cargo on the luggage carrier will make the
center of vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt
maneuvers. This could result in loss of control of
the vehicle.
To move the crossrail, pull up on the end levers on
each side of the crossrail to the upright position. This will
release the locking mechanism from the siderail. Lift
and place the crossrail into the new position. Press the
levers down until the locking mechanisms fully
engage to the side rail. Make sure each lever is in the
down position. The crossrail will not slide when properly
engaged.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 150 lbs (68 kg) or hangs over
the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your
vehicle. When loading cargo, tie it to the crossrail
and against the siderail. Lock the crossrails to
the far forward and backward location to make sure
the load is evenly distributed on the luggage
carrier.
2-44
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-22.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier
crossrails are locked and cargo is still securely fastened.
When the luggage carrier is not in use, store the
crossrail inside the vehicle. If not possible, lock one
crossrail at the rear most position on the siderails and
lock the other crossrail above the opening of the
rear door to reduce wind noise.
Rear Compartment Storage
Panel/Cover
Your vehicle may have an adjustable panel/cargo cover
feature. The panel/cargo cover can be adjusted into
three positions.
To use the panel in the lower position, do the following:
1. Insert the front corners of the panel into the
lower guides.
2. Slide the panel forward.
3. Press down on the back of the panel to lock it in
place.
There is a flip panel towards the front of the cargo
cover. You may have to flip this panel upward in order
to gain access to the cargo cover.
The panel can be used in this position if you need
additional space above the panel. Place the cargo on
top of the panel in this position.
2-45
{CAUTION:
If you were to carry things on the adjustable
panel when it is in the upper (cargo cover) or
center positions, during a sudden vehicle
movement or a crash, those things could be
thrown around in the vehicle. You or others
could be injured. When it is in the upper or
center position, always secure any cargo on
the floor beneath the panel/cover.
To use the panel in the center position, do the following:
1. Insert the front corners of the panel into the
middle guides.
2. Slide the panel forward.
3. Press down and pull rearward on the back of the
panel to lock it in place.
2-46
The panel can be used in this position when you have
to place a flat or spare tire in the rear cargo area.
To use the panel in the upper position, do the following:
1. Insert the front corners of the panel into the top
guides.
2. Slide the panel forward.
3. Press down and pull rearward on the back of the
panel to lock it in place.
This can be used as a cargo cover for the rear area.
The panel may be installed either carpet or plastic side
up. The panel may also be used as a table in this
position. See Table on page 2-47 for more information.
Rear Seat Armrest
Your vehicle may have a rear seat armrest that contains
two cupholders. To access the cupholders, pull the
armrest down from the rear seatback.
Table
To set up the table, do the following:
1. With the adjustable panel in the upper position, pull
it rearward to position it for use as a table. The
plastic side should be up.
2. Turn the knob to release the leg from the plastic
side of the table and turn the leg outward.
3. Set the table leg onto the liftgate lock striker at the
rear edge of the vehicle.
Make sure to place the table leg securely onto the
liftgate lock striker.
Notice: Driving with the panel extended into the
table position could damage your vehicle. Always
have the panel in the stored position while you
are driving.
Notice: Placing hot items on the surface of the
table could damage it. Always be sure that the items
that are placed on the surface of the table are of
moderate temperature.
Your vehicle may have an adjustable panel that also
functions as a table. The maximum load for the table is
100 lbs. distributed (45 kg).
There are four hooks located on the table that can be
used for grocery bags.
2-47
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a convenience net in the rear
of the vehicle. Store small loads as far forward as
possible. The net should not be used to store
heavy loads.
To express-open the
sunroof glass panel and
sunshade, press the switch
rearward and release it.
Sunroof
If the vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, the controls to
operate it are located on the headliner above the
rearview mirror. The ignition must be in RUN or ACC, or
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active, to
operate the sunroof. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 2-22 for more information.
To stop the sunroof before it is completely open, press
the switch rearward again. The sunshade cannot be
closed with the sunroof open.
To close the sunroof, press forward and hold the switch
until the sunroof stops, lifts and seals at the back of
the sunroof glass. Press forward on the switch again, to
make sure the sunroof is fully closed
To put the sunroof in the vent position, pull down on the
front of the switch. Push up on the front of the switch
to close it.
2-48
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-9
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9
Windshield Washer .......................................3-10
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...........................3-11
Cruise Control ..............................................3-11
Headlamps ..................................................3-14
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-14
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-15
Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-15
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-16
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-16
Dome Lamp .................................................3-17
Entry Lighting ...............................................3-17
Map Lamps .................................................3-17
Cargo Lamp .................................................3-18
Electric Power Management ...........................3-18
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-19
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-19
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-20
Climate Controls ............................................3-20
Climate Control System .................................3-20
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-24
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-24
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-26
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-27
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-28
Trip Odometer ..............................................3-28
Tachometer .................................................3-28
Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-28
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-29
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-30
Charging System Light ..................................3-32
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-33
Antilock Brake System Warning Light ...............3-34
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light ...........................................3-34
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ......3-35
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-35
Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-36
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-36
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-39
Change Engine Oil Light ................................3-40
Security Light ...............................................3-40
Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-40
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-41
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Reduced Engine Power Light .........................3-41
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-41
Service All-Wheel Drive Light .........................3-42
All-Wheel Drive Disabled Light ........................3-42
Gate Ajar Light .............................................3-42
Door Ajar Light .............................................3-43
Service Vehicle Soon Light ............................3-43
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-43
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-44
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-45
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-45
DIC Compass ..............................................3-49
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-52
DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-60
3-2
Audio System(s) .............................................3-67
Setting the Time ...........................................3-68
Radio(s) ......................................................3-71
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or Six-Disc
CD Player) ...............................................3-90
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and
DVD Player) .............................................3-95
XM Radio Messages ...................................3-100
Navigation/Radio System ..............................3-101
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System .........3-101
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-110
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-110
Radio Reception .........................................3-111
Multi-Band Antenna .....................................3-112
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-24.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-27.
D. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever. See Windshield
Wipers on page 3-9.
E. Driver Information Center Controls. See DIC
Operation and Displays on page 3-45.
F. Hazard Warning Flashers. See Hazard Warning
Flashers on page 3-6.
G. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-30.
H. Rear Window Wiper/Washer Buttons. See Rear
Window Wiper/Washer on page 3-11. Fog Lamps
Button. See Fog Lamps on page 3-16.
I. Power Mirror Control. See Outside Power Mirrors on
page 2-38.
J. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See Instrument
Panel Brightness on page 3-16.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
Cruise Controls. See Cruise Control on page 3-11.
Tilt Wheel. See Tilt Wheel on page 3-7.
Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio Steering
Wheel Controls on page 3-110.
Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-67.
Shift Lever. See Shifting Into PARK (P) on
page 2-33.
Traction Control System (TCS) Button. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-6.
Power Window Switches. See Power Windows on
page 2-16.
Climate Control System. See Climate Control
System on page 3-20. Heated Seat Buttons
(If Equipped). See Heated Seats on page 1-4.
Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-43.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
While the hazard warning flashers are on, the turn
signals do not work.
The hazard warning flashers let you warn the police and
others that you have a problem. The front and rear
turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position the key is in, and even if the key is not in the
ignition switch.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
towards the center of
the instrument panel.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Horn
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
3-6
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Your vehicle has a tilt wheel that allows you to adjust
the steering wheel.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn and
Lane-Change Signals on page 3-8.
The lever to tilt the steering wheel is located on the left
side of the steering column.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and push the
lever down. Then, move the steering wheel to a
comfortable position and pull the lever up firmly to lock
the column in place.
• 53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.
• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 3-9.
• O Exterior Lamp Control. See Headlamps
on page 3-14.
3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-99 and for burned-out bulbs.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high,
push the turn signal lever away from you. To change
from high beam to low beam, pull the turn signal
lever towards you. To flash the high beams from low
beam, pull the turn signal lever all the way towards you.
Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
will also be on.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until
the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete
the lane change. The lever will return by itself when
you release it.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers won’t see your turn signal.
3-8
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
To flash the high beams from low beam, pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever all the way towards you.
Then release it.
Windshield Wipers
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If the wiper blades are frozen to the
windshield, gently loosen or thaw them. If the blades
do become damaged, install new blades or blade
inserts. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on
page 5-51.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
Use the lever on the right side of the steering column to
operate the windshield wipers.
1 (High Speed): Move the lever to this position for
steady wiping at high speed.
6
(Low Speed): Move the lever to this position for
steady wiping at low speed.
3-9
& (Delay):
Move the lever to this position to set a
delay between wipes.
6 (Delay Adjustment):
Move the lever to the delay
position to choose a delayed wiping cycle. Turn
the intermittent adjust band down for a longer delay or
up for a shorter delay.
9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turn off the
windshield wipers.
Windshield Washer
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
8 (Mist):
Move the lever all the way down to mist
and release for a single wiping cycle. The windshield
wipers will stop after one wipe and the lever returns to
its parked position. If more wipes are needed, hold
the lever on mist longer.
3-10
There is a button marked with the windshield washer
symbol at the end of the windshield wiper lever. Press
this button to spray washer fluid on the windshield. The
wipers will run for a few cycles to clear the window and
then either stop or return to your preset speed. For more
wash cycles, press and hold the button longer.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
Cruise Control
The rear wiper and rear wash buttons are located on
the instrument panel above the audio system.
Cruise control lets you maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on
the accelerator. This can really help on long trips.
Cruise control does not work at speeds below
25 mph (40 km/h).
Z (Rear Wiper): Press this button to turn the rear
wiper on and off. When the wiper is on it will run
continuously at a preset speed.
Y (Wash):
Press this button to spray washer fluid on
the rear window. The window wiper will also come on.
Release the button when enough fluid has been sprayed
on the window. The rear wiper will run a few more cycles
after it is released. If the rear wiper function was already
on, prior to pressing the wash button, it will stay on until
the wiper button is pressed again.
{CAUTION:
The rear window washer uses the same fluid that is in
the windshield washer reservoir. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 5-33.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
3-11
I (On/Off): Press
system on and off.
Setting Cruise Control
I to turn the cruise control
{CAUTION:
RES+ (Resume): Press RES+ to resume a set speed
and to accelerate the speed.
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
SET− (Set): Press SET– to set a speed and to
decrease the speed.
The cruise control buttons
are located on the steering
wheel.
[ CANCEL:
Press
[ to cancel cruise control.
To set a speed do the following:
1. Press I to turn cruise control on. The indicator
light on the button comes on.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET− and release it. The cruise symbol
displays in the instrument panel cluster to show the
system is engaged.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control
shuts off.
If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction
Control System (TCS) begins to limit wheel spin, the
cruise control automatically disengages. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-6. When road
conditions allow, the cruise control can be used again.
3-12
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set the cruise control at a desired speed
and then apply the brakes. This disengages the
cruise control. The cruise symbol in the instrument
panel cluster also goes out indicating cruise is no longer
engaged. To return to the previously set speed, you
do not need to go through the set process again. Once
the vehicle is at a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more, you can briefly press the RES+.
This takes the vehicle back up to the previously chosen
speed and stays there.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
• If the cruise control system is already engaged,
press the RES+. Hold it there until you reach
the desired speed, and then release the button.
• To increase the vehicle’s speed in very small
amounts, briefly press the RES+ and then release it.
Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If the cruise control system is already engaged:
• Push and hold the SET− until the desired lower
speed is reached, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly push
the SET−. Each time this is done, the vehicle
goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle slows down to the previous cruise control speed
that was set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control works on hills depends
upon the vehicle’s speed, load, and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s
speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake or
shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle at a lower
speed. However, when the brakes are applied the cruise
control turns off. Many drivers find this to be too much
trouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills.
3-13
Ending Cruise Control
The exterior lamp control has the following positions:
There are three ways to disengage the cruise control:
AUTO (Off/Automatic Headlamps): Turn the control to
this position to put the headlamps in automatic mode.
Automatic mode will turn the exterior lamps on and
off depending upon how much light is available outside
of the vehicle.
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Press the I button, to turn off the cruise control
system.
• Press the [ button.
When cruise control disengages, the cruise symbol
in the instrument panel cluster goes out.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
Headlamps
The exterior lamp control is located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
; (Parking Lamps):
Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps together with the
following:
•
•
•
•
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
53 (Headlamps):
Turning the control to this
position turns on the headlamps, together with the
previously listed lamps and lights.
O (Exterior Lamp Control):
Turn the control with this
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
Headlamps on Reminder
If you open the driver’s door with the ignition off and the
lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.
3-14
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) are required on all
vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will make your low-beam headlamps
come on at a reduced brightness in daylight when
the following conditions are met:
•
•
•
•
•
The ignition is on.
The exterior lamp band is in the automatic position.
The transmission is not in PARK (P).
The light sensor determines it is daytime.
The parking brake is released.
When the DRL are on, the low-beam headlamps will be
on at a reduced brightness. The taillamps, sidemarker
and other lamps will not be on. The instrument panel will
not be lit up either.
When the exterior lamp band is turned to the headlamp
position, the low-beam headlamps come on. The
other lamps that come on with the headlamps will also
come on.
When the headlamps are turned off, the regular lamps
will go off, and the low-beam headlamps come on
to the reduced brightness.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, move the shift
lever to PARK (P). The DRL will stay off until the shift
lever is moved out of the PARK (P) position.
The regular headlamp system should be turned on
when needed.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside and the exterior lamps
control is in the automatic position, the headlamps
will come on automatically. See Headlamps on
page 3-14.
Your vehicle has a light sensor located on top of the
instrument panel. Make sure it is not covered, or
the headlamps will be on when you do not need them.
The system may also turn on the headlamps when
driving through a parking garage or tunnel.
3-15
Fog Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
Use the fog lamps for better visibility in foggy or misty
conditions.
This feature controls the brightness of the instrument
panel lights.
The fog lamps button is
located on the instrument
panel above the radio.
The control for this
feature is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering column.
To use the fog lamps, the parking lamps or low-beam
headlamps must be on.
Push the button to turn the fog lamps on or off.
The fog lamp button will be lit when the lamps are on.
The Fog lamps will go off whenever you turn the
high-beam headlamps on. When the high-beam
headlamps are turned off, the fog lamps will come
on again.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
3-16
Turn the control up to brighten the lights or down to
dim them.
Dome Lamp
Map Lamps
If the vehicle has a dome lamp with a switch, the
following are the settings.
9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turn the
lamp off, even when a door is open.
1 (Door): Move the lever to this position so that the
lamp comes on when a door is opened.
+ (On): Move the lever to this position to turn the
dome lamp on.
Entry Lighting
The dome lamp and the cargo lamp inside the vehicle
comes on when any door is opened, if the dome lamp is
in the door position. In addition, these lamps come on
when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) unlock button is
pressed. It stays on for 20 seconds or until a door is
opened. After the door is opened and then closed, the
light remains on for 20 seconds, or until the key is
put in the ignition and turned to the ON/RUN position.
Your vehicle may have lamps located on the headliner
above the rearview mirror. Push on the lens in the
lamp to turn them on and off.
3-17
Cargo Lamp
The cargo lamp is located over the rear compartment,
and is controlled by the dome lamp. See Dome Lamp on
page 3-17.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery’s temperature and state of
charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best performance
and extended life of the battery.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly put the charge back in. When
the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly
to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter
gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move up
or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert
will be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator (alternator) may not
be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the
power that is needed for very high electrical loads.
3-18
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high
speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of
some accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels
of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to
the driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC)
message might be displayed, such as Battery Saver
Active or Service Battery Charging System. If this
message is displayed, it is recommended that the
driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-52.
Battery Run-Down Protection
Your vehicle has a battery saver feature designed to
protect the vehicle’s battery.
When any interior lamp is left on and the ignition is
turned off, the battery rundown protection system will
automatically turn the lamp off after 20 minutes. This will
avoid draining the battery. This vehicle also has a
retained accessory power feature. If the radio is on, it
will turn off after 10 minutes or if any door on the vehicle
is opened. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 2-22.
Notice: If electrical devices are left plugged into a
power outlet, the battery may drain causing your
vehicle not to start or damage to the battery.
This would not be covered by the warranty. Always
unplug all electrical devices when turning off
your vehicle.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlets and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer/retailer for additional
information on the accessory power outlet.
The accessory power outlets can be used to connect
electrical equipment such as a cellular phone or
CB radio.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
The two accessory power outlets are located in the front
and at the rear of the center console storage area.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
To use the outlets, remove the cover. When not in use,
always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
3-19
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Climate Controls
Your vehicle may have a removable ashtray and
cigarette lighter. The ashtray can be placed into the
front console cupholders.
Climate Control System
To use the lighter, push it in all the way and let go.
When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating
of 15 amperes.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in
the ashtray.
3-20
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can
be controlled with this system. If your vehicle has the
remote start feature, the climate control system functions
as part of the remote start feature. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5.
Operation
9 (Fan):
Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
In any setting other than off, the fan runs continuously
with the ignition on. To turn off the air completely,
turn the fan to 0 and select the recirculation button.
Temperature Control: Turn the center knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside the vehicle.
Use the right knob to select from the following modes:
There is one position between each mode to finely
adjust airflow position.
H (Vent):
This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level):
This mode splits the air between the
instrument panel outlets and the floor outlets.
6 (Floor):
This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the windshield
and side windows.
You can also select modes by using the following
buttons:
; (Outside Air):
Press this button to turn the
outside air mode on. When this mode is on, outside air
will circulate throughout the vehicle. When the button
is pressed, an indicator light in the button comes on to
show that it is activated. The outside air mode can
be used with all modes, but it cannot be used with the
recirculation mode.
@ (Recirculation):
Press this button to recirculate
cabin air through the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering the vehicle or to help
heat or cool the air inside the vehicle more quickly. An
indicator light will come on in this mode. Operation in this
mode during periods of high humidity and cool outside
temperatures may result in increased window fogging. If
window fogging is experienced, select the defrost mode.
The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor, defrost,
or defogging modes. If you try to select recirculation in
one of those modes, the indicator light flashes several
times and turns off.
The right knob may also be used to select the defrost
and defog modes that are described in this section.
3-21
# (Air Conditioning):
Press this button to turn the air
conditioning system on or off. When this button is
pressed, an indicator light on the button comes on to
show that the air conditioning is activated. The air
conditioning can be selected in any mode as long as
the fan switch is on.
The air conditioning compressor does not operate when
outside temperatures fall below 38°F (3°C). The
indicator light flashes several times and turns off when
outside conditions affect air conditioning operation.
This is normal.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the
system to operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days, select the following
settings together:
1. Vent mode.
2. Outside air.
3. Air conditioning.
4. The coolest temperature.
5. The highest fan speed.
6. Once the vehicle’s interior temperature is below the
outside temperature, select recirculation mode for
enhanced cooling.
Using these settings together for long periods of time may
cause the air inside of the vehicle to become too dry.
To prevent this from happening, after the air inside of
the vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water might drip underneath
the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
( (Heated Seats):
If your vehicle has heated seats,
see Heated Seats on page 1-4.
3-22
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog or frost on the inside of windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
glass. This can be minimized if the climate control
system is used properly.
Use the defog mode to clear the windows of fog or
moisture and warm the passengers. Use the defrost
mode to remove fog or frost from the windshield more
quickly. When either of these modes are selected, the
system runs the air conditioning compressor and cancels
the recirculation mode to dry the air. For best results,
clear all snow and ice from the windshield before
defrosting.
Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrost mode.
- (Defog):
This mode directs half of the air to the
windshield and the side window outlets, and half to the
floor outlets.
0 (Defrost):
This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield and the side window outlets, with some
air directed to the floor outlets.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
The rear window defogger only works when the ignition
is in ON/RUN.
< (Rear):
Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light on the button comes
on to show that the rear window defogger is activated.
The rear window defroster stays on for about 10 minutes
if the vehicle remains at slower vehicle speeds or until
the button is pressed, or unless the ignition is turned
to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF. If turned on again,
the defogger only runs for about five minutes before
turning off again. At higher vehicle speeds, the defogger
may stay on continuously. The defogger can always
be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning
off the ignition.
3-23
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the rear
defogger automatically turns on if it is cold outside.
When the vehicle transitions out of the remote start
mode, the rear defogger will turn off. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside
of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Do not attach
a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or
anything similar to the defogger grid.
Remote Start Climate Control Operation
If your vehicle has the remote start feature and it
is activated, the climate control system heats and cools
the inside of the vehicle using the modes that were
set before the vehicle was turned off and the rear
defogger automatically turns on. If your vehicle has
heated seats, they may turn on if it is cold outside
and will shut off when the key is turned to ON/RUN.
See Heated Seats on page 1-4.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the louvers located on the air outlets to change the
direction of the airflow.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the vehicle that may block
the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Do not use any non-GM approved hood deflectors
that could adversely affect the performance of the
system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Outside air is routed through a passenger compartment
air filter before entering the vehicle. This filter removes
certain particles from the air, including pollen and
dust particles. Reductions in airflow, which may occur
more quickly in dusty areas, indicate that the filter needs
to be replaced early.
The filter should be replaced as part of routine
scheduled maintenance. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for when to replace the filter.
3-24
To change the passenger compartment air filter, use the
following steps:
1. The passenger’s side air inlet panel is located
below the center of the passenger’s side wiper
blade. Remove the push pin retaining the air
inlet panel. Pry the center of the push pin out
0.5 in (13 mm) for removal.
2. Open the hood.
3. Remove the three push pins from the top and
forward edge of the passenger’s side air inlet
panel.
4. Remove the air inlet panel to access the filter.
5. Press the release tab on the driver’s side of the filter
and pull out the edge of the filter.
6. Remove the filter from the vehicle.
7. Install a new passenger compartment air filter.
For the type of filter to use see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 6-14.
8. Reverse Steps 1 through 5.
3-25
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This section describes the warning lights and gages on
your vehicle.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As the
details show on the next few pages, some warning lights
come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you
know they are working. If you are familiar with this
section, you should not be alarmed when this happens.
3-26
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know
when there is a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
as you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells
you what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even
dangerous. So get to know your vehicle’s warning lights
and gages. They can be a big help.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how
fast you are going, how much fuel you are using, and many other things you will need to drive safely and economically.
United States version shown, Canada and GXP Model similar
3-27
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The tachometer shows your engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the solid red area, your vehicle could
be damaged. The damages would not be covered
by your warranty. Do not operate the engine in
the solid red area.
Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer.
The digital odometer will read 999,999 if someone
tries to turn it back.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to
the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must be.
If not, then it is set at zero and a label must be put
on the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading
when the new odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer
Your trip odometer is located in the Driver Information
Center and shows how far your vehicle has been driven
since the trip odometer was last reset. For more
information see DIC Operation and Displays on
page 3-45.
3-28
Safety Belt Reminders
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime will come on
for several seconds to remind people to fasten their
safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already
buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s belt
is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will
come on.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime will
sound for several seconds to remind the front passenger
to buckle their safety belt. This would only occur if the
passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 1-64 for more information. The
passenger safety belt light, located on the instrument
panel, will come on and stay on for several seconds and
then flash for several more.
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel
cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensor, the
pretensioners, the airbag modules, the wiring and
the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more
information on the airbag system, see Airbag System
on page 1-56.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will come on.
3-29
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start
the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag status
indicator.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start
your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you start the engine. If the light does
not come on then, have it fixed immediately. If there
is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag Driver
Information Center (DIC) message may also come
on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-52 for
more information.
3-30
United States
Canada
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator will
light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to
let you know the status of the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-64
for more on this, including important safety information.
3-31
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-29 for more on this, including
important safety information.
3-32
Charging System Light
If this light comes on while
you are driving, you may
have a problem with
the charging system.
A charging system Driver Information Center (DIC)
message may also appear. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-52 for more information.
This light could indicate that you have problems with
a generator drive belt, or another electrical problem.
Have it checked right away. If you must drive a
short distance with the light on, be certain to turn off all
your accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If the brake system warning light comes on, there is a
brake problem. Have your brake system inspected
right away.
A chime will also sound if the parking brake is not fully
released and the vehicle is moving. If it stays on
after your parking brake is fully released, it means you
have a brake problem.
The brake light will also come on to indicate a low brake
fluid level. See Brakes on page 5-34 for more information.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal
is harder to push or the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-27.
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
The brake light is located in the instrument panel
cluster.
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system warning light on
can lead to an accident. If the light is still on
after you have pulled off the road and stopped
carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.
When the ignition is on, the brake light will come on
when you set your parking brake. The light will stay
on if your parking brake does not release fully.
3-33
Antilock Brake System Warning
Light
For vehicles with
the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), this light
will come on briefly
when you start the engine.
That is normal. If the light does not come on then, have
it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the light
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as it is
safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the
engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light still
stays on, or comes on again while you are driving, your
vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do
not have antilock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you do not have antilock brakes
and there is a problem with your regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-33
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-52 for all
brake related DIC messages.
3-34
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
Your vehicle has a
Traction Control
System (TCS) and
StabiliTrak® warning light.
When the traction control is activated the light will
flash when the TCS is limiting wheel spin or when the
StabiliTrak® system is active. You may feel or hear
the system working, but this is normal. This light may
also come on after extended heavy braking indicating
the brakes have become too hot to limit wheel spin.
This light will come on and stay on if the TCS is turned
off using the traction control on/off button, located
next to the gear shift lever.
If the TCS warning light comes on and stays on for an
extended period of time when the system is turned
on, your vehicle needs service. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-6 and StabiliTrak® System on
page 4-7 for more information.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
The engine coolant
temperature warning light
will come on when the
engine has overheated.
If this happens you should pull over and turn off the
engine as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-25 for more information.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause your vehicle to
overheat. See Engine Overheating on page 5-25.
Your vehicle could be damaged, and it might not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive with
the engine coolant temperature warning light on.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage measures the
temperature of the
vehicle’s engine coolant.
If the indicator needle moves towards the shaded in
thermostat, the engine is too hot. The engine coolant
temperature warning light will turn on. See Engine
Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 3-35 for
more information.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, and the engine coolant temperature
warning light comes on, you should pull off the road,
stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon
as possible.
3-35
Tire Pressure Light
This light comes on briefly
when the engine is started.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makes
sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
The check engine light
comes on to indicate
that there is an OBD II
problem and service
is required.
This light will also come on when one or more of your
tires are significantly underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), may accompany the light. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-52 for more
information.
Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to
do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.
See Tires on page 5-52 for more information.
If a problem is detected with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System, this light will flash for approximately
60 seconds and then stay on solid for the remainder of
the ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 5-62 for more information.
3-36
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. This can prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This could
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3.
If the Light is Flashing
This light comes on, as a check to show it is working,
when the ignition is turned ON/RUN but the engine is not
running. If the light does not come on, have it repaired.
This light also comes on during a malfunction in
one of two ways:
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
could damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be required.
The following can prevent more serious damage to your
vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Reduce vehicle speed.
Avoid hard accelerations.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the ignition off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps and see your dealer/retailer
for service as soon as possible.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
3-37
If the Light Is On Steady
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
You might be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality causes
the engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You
might notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when
you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration — these
conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up.
This will be detected by the system and cause the light to
turn on.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet. The
condition is usually corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
3-38
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn
off, your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your
dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that might have developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced the battery or if the battery
has run down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems during normal
driving. This can take several days of routine driving. If
you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass
the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness, your
dealer/retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Light
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for changing engine oil.
This light will come on
briefly when you start your
engine. If it does not,
have your vehicle serviced.
3-39
When the light comes on and stays on, it means that
oil is not flowing through your engine properly. You could
be low on oil and you might have some other system
problem.
Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-18, and
PASS-Key® III+ Operation
on page 2-19.
Change Engine Oil Light
Fog Lamp Light
If this light comes on and stays on for 30 seconds,
it means that service is required for your vehicle.
A CHANGE OIL SOON message will appear on the
DIC. For more information see DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-52.
After having the oil changed you will need to reset the
light. See Engine Oil on page 5-15, and Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information.
3-40
The fog lamp light will
come on when the fog
lamps are in use.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 3-16 for more information.
Cruise Control Light
This light comes on
whenever you set the
cruise control.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
See Cruise Control on page 3-11 for more information.
Reduced Engine Power Light
Your vehicle has
a reduced engine
power light.
This light, along with the service vehicle soon light,
will be displayed when a noticeable reduction in the
vehicle’s performance may occur. Stop the vehicle and
turn off the ignition. Wait for 10 seconds and restart your
vehicle. This may correct the condition. See Service
Vehicle Soon Light on page 3-43 for more information.
The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed when
the reduced engine power light is on, but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. The performance may
be reduced until the next time you drive your vehicle.
If this light stays on, see your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible for diagnosis and repair.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8
for more information.
3-41
Service All-Wheel Drive Light
This light is located in the
center of your instrument
panel cluster.
An ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF message will appear in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) too. This light will turn off
when the rear drive system cools down. If this light stays
on for a while, you need to reset the light. To reset the
light, turn the ignition off and then back on again. If the
light stays on, see your dealer/retailer right away.
See All-Wheel Drive on page 5-44 and DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-52 for more information.
Gate Ajar Light
This light and the SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE
message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) will
come on and stay on to indicate that there may be a
problem with the drive system and service is required.
See All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System on page 4-8
and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-52 for
more information.
If this light comes on, your
liftgate is not completely
closed. Driving with the
liftgate open can cause
carbon monoxide (CO)
to enter the vehicle.
All-Wheel Drive Disabled Light
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-36 for more information.
This light will come on
when the rear drive system
is overheating.
3-42
Door Ajar Light
Fuel Gage
This light will come on
when a door is ajar.
When the ignition is on,
the fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you
have left in your tank.
Do not drive with a door ajar.
Service Vehicle Soon Light
For vehicles with this light,
it will come on if a
condition exists that may
require the vehicle to
be taken in for service.
When the indicator nears empty, the low fuel light
will come on. You still have a little fuel left, but you
should get more soon. See Low Fuel Warning Light
on page 3-44 for more information.
If the light comes on, see your dealer/retailer for service
as soon as possible.
3-43
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the service station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
• The gage takes a few seconds to stabilize after the
ignition is turned on, and will go back to empty
when you turn the ignition off.
For your fuel tank capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-105.
3-44
Low Fuel Warning Light
This light is located in
the fuel gage. For more
information see Fuel Gage
on page 3-43.
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
When you add fuel the light should go off. If it does not,
have your vehicle serviced.
A “Fuel Level LOW” message also appears in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See Fuel Gage on page 3-43
for more information.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
DIC Operation and Displays
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
All messages will appear in the DIC display located in the
center of the instrument panel cluster. The DIC buttons
are located on the center of the instrument panel.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine was turned off.
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system
information, and warning messages if a system problem
is detected. The top of the DIC display shows the shift
lever position indicator. See Automatic Transmission
Operation (3.4L V6 with 5-Speed) on page 2-25 or
Automatic Transmission Operation (3.6L V6 with
6-Speed) on page 2-28 for more information.
If your vehicle has these feature, the DIC also displays
the compass direction and the outside air temperature
when viewing the trip and fuel information. If there is a
problem with the system that controls the temperature
display, the numbers will be replaced with dashes. If this
occurs, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an
extended period of time, consult your dealer/retailer.
Under certain circumstances, especially when the engine
is idling, a delay updating the temperature display is
normal.
The DIC also allows some features to be personalized.
See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-60 for
more information.
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the DIC buttons located on the center
of the instrument panel.
DIC Buttons
The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicle information, and
set/reset buttons. The button functions are detailed
in the following pages.
3 (Trip/Fuel):
Press this button to scroll through
the trip and fuel displays. See “Trip/Fuel Menu Items”
following for more information on these displays.
T (Vehicle Information):
Press this button to
scroll through the vehicle information displays and
to personalize the feature settings on your vehicle.
See “Vehicle Information Menu Items” following and
DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-60 for more
information on these displays.
3-45
V (Set/Reset):
Press this button to set or reset certain
functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages
on the DIC.
AVG (Average) SPD (Speed)
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll through
the following displays:
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG (Average) SPD
(Speed) displays. This display shows the average speed
of the vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers
per hour (km/h). This average is calculated based on the
various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset
of this value. To reset the value, press and hold
the set/reset button. The display will return to zero.
ODOMETER
AVG (Average) ECON (Economy)
Press the trip/fuel button until ODOMETER displays.
This display shows the distance the vehicle has
been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). This
display will also show the outside air temperature in
either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG (Average)
ECON (Economy) displays. This display shows the
approximate average miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number is calculated
based on the number of mpg (L/100 km) recorded since
the last time this menu item was reset. To reset this
display, press and hold the set/reset button. The display
will return to zero.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
To change the DIC display to English or metric units,
see “UNITS” later in this section.
TRIP
Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP displays. This
display shows the current distance traveled in either
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset for the
trip odometer. This display will also show the outside
air temperature in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
or degrees Celsius (°C).
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the
set/reset button while the trip odometer is displayed.
3-46
RANGE
Vehicle Information Menu Items
Press the trip/fuel button until RANGE displays. This
display shows the approximate number of remaining
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehicle can be driven
without refueling.
T (Vehicle Information):
The fuel range estimate is based on an average of
the vehicle’s fuel economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
This estimate will change if driving conditions change.
For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent
stops, this display may read one number, but if
the vehicle is driven on a freeway, the number may
change even though the same amount of fuel is in the
fuel tank. This is because different driving conditions
produce different fuel economies. Generally, freeway
driving produces better fuel economy than city driving.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message will be displayed. See “FUEL LEVEL LOW”
under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-52
for more information.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
Press this button to scroll
through the following displays:
OIL LIFE
Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate of
the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains. The engine oil life system will alert
you to change the oil on a schedule consistent with your
driving conditions.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the
display along with the Change Engine Oil Light on
the instrument panel cluster. See “CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON” under DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-52 and Change Engine Oil Light on
page 3-40. You should change the oil as soon as
possible. See Engine Oil on page 5-15. In addition
to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life,
additional maintenance is recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information.
3-47
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself
after each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be
careful not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any
time other than when the oil has just been changed.
It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change.
To reset the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil
Life System on page 5-18.
UNITS
Press the vehicle information button until UNITS
displays. This display allows you to select between
English or Metric units of measurement. Once in this
display, press the set/reset button to select between
ENGLISH or METRIC units.
FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES
The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC.
The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the vehicle
information button until the DIC displays FRONT TIRES
PSI (kPa) LF ## RF ##. Press the vehicle information
button again until the DIC displays REAR TIRES
PSI (kPa) LR ## RR ##.
3-48
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by
the system while driving, a message advising you
to check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in
the display. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-59
and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-52 for
more information.
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of
a value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this
consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer for service.
BATTERY
Press the vehicle information button until BATTERY
displays. This display shows the current battery voltage.
If the voltage is normal, the display will show NORMAL.
If the voltage is low or high, the display will show
LOW or HIGH. Your vehicle’s charging system regulates
voltage based on the state of the battery. The battery
voltage may fluctuate when viewing this information
on the DIC. This is normal. See Charging System Light
on page 3-32 for more information.
If there is a problem with the battery charging system,
the DIC will display SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM. See “SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM” under DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-52. Also, see Electric Power Management
on page 3-18 for more information.
LEARN REMOTE KEY
CALIBRATE COMPAS (Compass)
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match
an RKE transmitter to your vehicle:
Your vehicle may have this feature. The compass can
be manually calibrated. To calibrate the compass
through the DIC, see DIC Compass on page 3-49.
1. Make sure the vehicle is in PARK (P).
CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
2. Press the vehicle information button until LEARN
REMOTE KEY PRESS V TO BEGIN displays.
Your vehicle may have this feature. To change the
compass zone through the DIC, see DIC Compass
on page 3-49.
3. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
4. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on
the first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is
matched.
5. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat
Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of
four transmitters matched to it.
6. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
FEATURE SETTNGS (Settings):
PRESS V TO SELCT (Select)
This display allows you to personalize the feature
settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-60 for more information.
DIC Compass
Your vehicle may have a compass in the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
3-49
Compass Zone
The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.
Your dealer/retailer will set the correct zone for your
location.
Under certain circumstances, such as during a long
distance cross-country trip or moving to a new state
or province, it will be necessary to compensate for
compass variance by resetting the zone through the
DIC if the zone is not set correctly.
Compass variance is the difference between the earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the compass
is not set to the zone where you live, the compass may
give false readings. The compass must be set to the
variance zone in which the vehicle is traveling.
To adjust for compass variance, use the following
procedure:
Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure
1. Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is
moving. Only set it when the vehicle is in PARK (P).
Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
displays.
2. Find the vehicle’s current location and variance
zone number on the map.
Zones 1 through 15 are available.
3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and
select the appropriate variance zone.
4. Press the trip/fuel button until the vehicle heading,
for example, N for North, is displayed in the DIC.
5. If calibration is necessary, calibrate the compass.
See “Compass Calibration Procedure” following.
3-50
Compass Calibration
To calibrate the compass, use the following procedure:
The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate
the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location,
such as an open parking lot, where driving the vehicle
in circles is not a danger. It is suggested to calibrate
away from tall buildings, utility wires, manhole covers,
or other industrial structures, if possible.
Compass Calibration Procedure
If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display, the
compass should be calibrated.
If the DIC display does not show a heading, for
example, N for North, or the heading does not change
after making turns, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may be
caused by a magnetic CB or cell phone antenna mount, a
magnetic emergency light, magnetic note pad holder, or
any other magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle, move the
magnetic item, then turn on the vehicle and calibrate the
compass.
1. Before calibrating the compass, make sure the
compass zone is set to the variance zone in
which the vehicle is located. See “Compass
Variance (Zone) Procedure” earlier in this section.
Do not operate any switches such as window,
sunroof, climate controls, seats, etc. during
the calibration procedure.
2. Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO CALIBRATE COMPAS (Compass)
displays.
3. Press the set/reset button to start the compass
calibration.
4. The DIC will display CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in tight circles at less
than 5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the calibration.
The DIC will display CALIBRATION COMPLETE
for a few seconds when the calibration is complete.
The DIC display will then return to the
previous menu.
3-51
DIC Warnings and Messages
ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct
the condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another.
If your vehicle has the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system,
this message displays along with the All-Wheel Drive
Disabled light when the rear drive system is overheating.
This message turns off when the rear drive system cools
down. If the warning message stays on for a while, you
need to reset the warning message. To reset the warning
message, turn the ignition off and then back on again.
If the message stays on, see your dealer/retailer right
away. See All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System on page 4-8
and All-Wheel Drive Disabled Light on page 3-42 for
more information.
Some messages may not require immediate action,
but you can press the set/reset button to acknowledge
that you received the messages and to clear them
from the display. Pressing any of the DIC buttons
also acknowledge and clear any messages.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be cleared. You should
take any messages that appear on the display seriously
and remember that clearing the messages will only
make the messages disappear, not correct the problem.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
3-52
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This message displays when the charging system
detects that the battery is being drained. You may notice
that the vehicle attempts to reduce the drain for you by
turning off accessories, such as interior fans, rear
defogger, and heated seats. Turn off all accessories.
If the vehicle is not running, start and run the engine for
at least 10 minutes to allow the battery to recharge. If the
engine is running and the condition persists, see your
dealer/retailer. See Electric Power Management on
page 3-18 for more information.
BUCKLE PASSENGER SEATBELT
This message reminds you to buckle the passenger’s
safety belt. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 1-64.
This message is an additional reminder to the Safety
Belt Reminder Light in the instrument panel cluster.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-28.
CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN CIRCLES
This message displays and a chime sounds when
the ignition is on, the driver’s safety belt is buckled, the
passenger’s safety belt is unbuckled with the passenger
airbag enabled, and the vehicle is in motion. You should
have the passenger buckle their safety belt.
This message displays when calibrating the compass.
Drive the vehicle in circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h)
to complete the calibration. See DIC Compass on
page 3-49 for more information.
This reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on,
the vehicle is in motion, the driver is buckled and the
passenger is still unbuckled, and the passenger airbag
is enabled. If the passenger’s safety belt is already
buckled, this message and chime will not come on.
This message displays when the compass calibration is
complete. See DIC Compass on page 3-49 for more
information.
BUCKLE SEATBELT
This message reminds you to buckle the driver’s
safety belt.
This message displays and a chime sounds when
the ignition is on, the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled,
and the vehicle is in motion. You should buckle
your safety belt.
If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignition is
on and the vehicle is in motion, the reminder will
be repeated. If the driver’s safety belt is already
buckled, this message and chime will not come on.
CALIBRATION COMPLETE
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays and the Change Engine Oil Light
in the instrument panel cluster turns on when service
is required for the vehicle. See your dealer/retailer.
See Change Engine Oil Light on page 3-40, Engine
Oil on page 5-15 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4 for more information.
Acknowledging this message will not reset the OIL LIFE
REMAINING display. That must be done at the OIL LIFE
screen under the vehicle information menu. See “OIL
LIFE” under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-45
and Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18 for more
information.
3-53
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
This message displays when the pressure in one or more
of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked. This message
also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRNT (Front), LEFT
REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire needs to be
checked. You can receive more than one tire pressure
message at a time. To read the other messages that may
have been sent at the same time, press the set/reset
button. If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC,
stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures
checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading
Information label. See Tires on page 5-52, Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-22, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-59. The DIC also shows the tire pressure values.
See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-45. If the tire
pressure is low, the low tire pressure warning light comes
on. See Tire Pressure Light on page 3-36.
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
This message displays when the driver door is not
closed properly. Close the door completely.
3-54
ENGINE HOT
A/C (Air Conditioning) OFF
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor is automatically turned off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the A/C
operation automatically resumes. You can continue to
drive your vehicle.
ENGINE OVERHEATD (Overheated)
IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-25 for more information.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down.
ENGINE OVRHEATD (Overheated)
STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 5-25
for more information.
This message displays along with a continuous chime
when the engine has overheated. Stop and turn the
engine off immediately to avoid severe engine damage.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-25.
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine
power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but
there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your
destination. The performance may be reduced the next
time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a
reduced speed while this message is on, but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays
on, the vehicle should be taken to your dealer/retailer for
service as soon as possible.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays and the Low Fuel Warning Light
in the instrument panel cluster comes on when your
vehicle is low on fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon
as possible. See Fuel Gage on page 3-43, Low Fuel
Warning Light on page 3-44, and Filling the Tank
on page 5-8 for more information.
HOOD OPEN
This message displays on some vehicles when the
hood is not closed properly. Close the hood completely.
See Hood Release on page 5-11.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE
This message displays when the outside air temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
LIFTGATE OPEN
This message displays when the liftgate is not closed
completely. Close the liftgate completely. See Liftgate
on page 2-13.
3-55
OIL PRSSURE (Pressure) LOW STOP
ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
See Engine Oil on page 5-15 for more information.
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine
oil pressure is low. The oil pressure light also appears
on the instrument panel cluster. See Oil Pressure
Light on page 3-39.
Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage can
result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure. Have
the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible when this message is displayed.
PASSENGER DOOR FRONT/
REAR OPEN
This message displays when one or more of the
passenger doors are not closed properly. Close the
doors completely.
3-56
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays while you are matching a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.
See “LEARN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Operation
and Displays on page 3-45 for more information.
SERVICE A/C (Air Conditioning)
SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem
detected in the air conditioning system. Have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays when there is a problem with
the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 3-29 for more information.
SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE
If your vehicle has the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system,
this message displays along with the service all-wheel
drive light if a problem occurs with this system. See
Service All-Wheel Drive Light on page 3-42. If this
message appears, stop as soon as possible and turn
off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the
message on the DIC display. If the message is still
displayed or appears again when you begin driving, the
AWD system needs service. See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem with the
generator and battery charging systems. Driving with
this problem could drain the vehicle’s battery. Turn off all
unnecessary accessories. Stop and turn off the vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. Have the electrical
system checked by your dealer/retailer immediately.
Connecting a battery charger to your vehicle while the
ignition is in any position other than LOCK/OFF may
cause this message to appear. If you need to charge
your vehicle, make sure that the key is in LOCK/OFF
or out of the ignition during charging.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays and a chime sounds when the
brake fluid level is low. The brake system warning
light also appears on the instrument panel cluster when
this message appears on the DIC. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 3-33. Have the brake system
serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
SERVICE POWER STEERING
On some vehicles, this message displays when a
problem is detected with the power steering system.
When this message is displayed, you may notice that
the effort required to steer the vehicle increases or feels
heavier, but you will still be able to steer the vehicle. Have
your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer immediately.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
This message displays if there has been a problem
detected with the StabiliTrak® System. A warning light
also appears on the instrument panel cluster. See
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light on
page 3-34. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-7
for more information.
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull
off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.
Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off and
then back on. If this message still stays on or turns back
on again while you are driving, your vehicle needs
service. Have the StabiliTrak® System inspected by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
3-57
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
This message displays when there is a problem with
the theft-deterrent system. A fault has been detected in
the system which means that the system is disabled
and it is not protecting the vehicle. The vehicle usually
restarts; however, you may want to take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer before turning off the engine.
See PASS-Key® III+ Operation on page 2-19 for more
information.
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is not functioning properly. A warning
light also appears on the instrument panel cluster.
See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light
on page 3-34 and Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 4-6 for more information. Have the TCS serviced
by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
the same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on
page 3-36. Several conditions may cause this message
to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 5-63 for more information. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
3-58
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays when a non-emissions related
malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
STABILITRAK NOT READY
This message may display and a warning light on the
instrument panel cluster may be on after first driving the
vehicle and exceeding 30 mph (48 km/h) for 30 seconds.
See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light on
page 3-34. The StabiliTrak® System is not functional
until the light has turned off. See StabiliTrak® System
on page 4-7 for more information.
STABILITRAK OFF
®
This message displays any time the StabiliTrak System
turns off. When this message has been displayed,
StabiliTrak® is no longer available to assist you with
directional control of the vehicle. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-7.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN.
Any of the following conditions may cause the
StabiliTrak® System to turn off:
• The StabiliTrak® System is turned off by pressing
and holding the traction control button. See
StabiliTrak® System on page 4-7 for more
information.
• The battery is low.
• There is a StabiliTrak® System failure. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
STARTING DISABLD (Disabled)
SERVICE THRTTLE (Throttle)
This message displays if the starting of the engine is
disabled due to the electronic throttle control system.
Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer
immediately.
This message only appears while the ignition is in
ON/RUN, and will not disappear until the problem is
resolved.
This message cannot be acknowledged.
THEFT ATTEMPTED
This message displays if the content theft-deterrent
system has detected a break-in attempt while you were
away from your vehicle. See Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-18 for more information.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays when the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) is re-learning the tire positions on your
vehicle. The tire positions must be re-learned after
rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor.
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-67,
Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-62, and
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-59 for more
information.
3-59
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) turns off. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-6 for more information.
This message displays as a reminder to turn off the turn
signal if you drive your vehicle for more than about
0.75 mile (1.2 km) with a turn signal on. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
ON/RUN and disappears after 10 seconds, unless
it is acknowledged or an urgent warning appears.
Any of the following conditions may cause the TCS to
turn off:
• The TCS is turned off by pressing the traction
control button. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-6 for more information.
• The battery is low.
• There is a TCS failure. See your dealer/retailer for
service.
TRACTION CONTROL ON
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) turns on. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-6 for more information.
This message displays and a chime sounds only
when the ignition is in ON/RUN. The message will not
disappear until the turn signal is manually turned off,
or a turn is completed.
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to one preferred setting.
All of the personalization options may not be available
on your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on the DIC.
The default settings for the personalization features
were set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
The personalization preferences are automatically
recalled.
To change personalization preferences, use the
following procedure.
3-60
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
PARK (P).
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press the vehicle information button until FEATURE
SETTNGS (Settings): PRESS V TO SELCT (Select)
appears on the DIC display.
3. Press the set/reset button to enter the feature
settings menu.
If the menu is not available, FEATURE SETTNGS
(Settings): AVAILABLE IN PRK (Park) will display.
Before entering the menu, make sure the vehicle is in
PARK (P).
Press the vehicle information button until the
PRESS V TO DISPLAY ENGLISH screen appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to display
all DIC messages in English.
DISPLAY LANG. (Language)
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear.
Press the vehicle information button until DISPLAY
LANG. (Language) appears on the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the vehicle information
button to scroll through the following settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
Feature Settings Menu Items
FRENCH: All messages will appear in French.
The following are personalization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:
SPANISH: All messages will appear in Spanish.
DISPLAY ENGLISH
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
This feature will only display if a language other than
English has been set. This feature allows you to change
the language in which the DIC messages appear to
English.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-61
AUTO LOCK
AUTO UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select when the vehicle’s
doors will automatically lock. See Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-12 for more
information.
This feature allows you to select whether or not to
turn off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also
allows you to select which doors and when the doors
will automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic
Door Locks on page 2-12 for more information.
Press the vehicle information button until AUTO LOCK
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
to access the settings for this feature. Then press the
vehicle information button to scroll through the following
settings:
OUT OF PARK (default): The vehicle’s doors
automatically lock when the doors are closed and
the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
AT SPEED: The vehicle’s doors automatically lock
when the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h)
for three seconds.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
Press the vehicle information button until AUTO
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the vehicle information button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will unlock
when the key is taken out of the ignition.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when
the key is taken out of the ignition.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-62
REMOTE LOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter if any of the doors are open. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5 for
more information.
Press the vehicle information button until REMOTE
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the vehicle information button to scroll through
the following settings:
HORN/LIGHTS OFF: There will be no feedback when
you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
HORN CHIRP ONLY: The horn will sound on the
second press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
HORN/ LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps
will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE
transmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock button
is pressed again within five seconds of the previous
command.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
REMOTE UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the
RKE transmitter. You will not receive feedback when
unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if
the doors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2-5 for more information.
Press the vehicle information button until REMOTE
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the vehicle information button to scroll
through the following settings:
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when
you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-63
DELAY LOCK
EXIT LIGHTNG (Lighting)
This feature allows you to select whether or not the
locking of the vehicle’s doors and liftgate will be delayed.
When locking the doors and liftgate with the power door
lock switch and a door or the liftgate is open, this feature
will delay locking the doors and liftgate until five seconds
after the last door is closed. You will hear three chimes to
signal that the delayed locking feature is in use. The key
must be out of the ignition for this feature to work. You
can temporarily override delayed locking by pressing the
power door lock switch twice or the lock button on the
RKE transmitter twice. See Delayed Locking on
page 2-12 for more information.
Press the vehicle information button until DELAY LOCK
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
to access the settings for this feature. Then press the
vehicle information button to scroll through the following
settings:
This feature allows you to select the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark
enough outside. This happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
LOCK DELAY OFF: There will be no delayed locking
of the vehicle’s doors.
LOCK DELAY ON (default): The doors will not lock
until five seconds after the last door or the liftgate is
closed.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-64
Press the vehicle information button until EXIT
LIGHTNG (Lighting) appears on the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the vehicle information button to
scroll through the following settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on
for 30 seconds.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
APPRCH (Approach) LIGHTNG (Lighting)
CHIME VOLUME
This feature allows you to select whether or not to have
the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light periods
after unlocking the vehicle using the RKE transmitter.
This feature allows you to select the volume level of
the chime.
Press the vehicle information button until APPRCH
(Approach) LIGHTNG (Lighting) appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the vehicle information
button to scroll through the following settings:
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the
lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or
the vehicle is no longer off. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5 for more
information.
Press the vehicle information button until CHIME
VOLUME appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the vehicle information button to scroll
through the following settings:
NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a normal
level.
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will
stay at the last known setting.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-65
REMOTE START
FACTORY SETTNGS (Settings)
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn the
remote start off or on. The remote start feature allows
you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using
the RKE transmitter. See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2-8 for more information.
This feature allows you to set all of the personalization
features back to their factory default settings.
Press the vehicle information button until REMOTE
START appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the vehicle information button to scroll through the
following settings:
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-66
Press the vehicle information button until FACTORY
SETTNGS (Settings) appears on the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the vehicle information button
to scroll through the following settings:
RESTORE ALL (default): The personalization features
will be set to their factory default settings.
DO NOT RESTORE: The personalization features will
not be set to their factory default settings.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
FEATURE SETTNGS (Settings):
PRESS V TO EXIT
This feature allows you to exit the feature
settings menu.
Press the vehicle information button until FEATURE
SETTNGS (Settings): PRESS V TO EXIT appears in
the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to exit
the menu.
If you do not exit, pressing the vehicle information
button again will return you to the beginning of the
vehicle information menu.
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:
•
•
•
•
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read the
pages following to familiarize yourself with its features.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.
The trip/fuel DIC button is pressed.
The end of the feature settings menu is reached
and exited.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for
safe driving. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.
3-67
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls if the vehicle has them.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering
mobile radio and telephone units. If sound equipment
can be added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with the
operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other
systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s
systems may interfere with the operation of sound
equipment that has been added.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-22 for more
information.
3-68
Setting the Time
Without Date Display
AM/FM Base Radio with a
Single CD Player
This type of radio has a H (clock) button for setting the
time. Set the time by following these steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press the H button until the hour begins flashing
on the display. Press the H button a second time
and the minutes begin flashing on the display.
3. While either the hour or the minutes are flashing, turn
the f (tune) knob, located on the upper right side of
the radio, clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the time. Instead of using the f knob,
you can also press the SEEK arrows, \ FWD
(forward), or s REV (reverse) buttons to adjust
the time.
4. Press the H button again until the clock display
stops flashing to set the currently displayed time;
otherwise, the flashing stops after five seconds and
the current time displayed is automatically set.
With Date Display
Single CD (MP3) or a Single CD
and DVD (MP3) Player
These radios have a
time and date.
H (clock) button for setting the
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press the H button and the HR, MIN, MM, DD,
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year)
displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of
the labels that you want to change. Every time
the pushbutton is pressed again, the time or
the date if selected, increases by one.
• Another way to increase the time or date, is to
press the right SEEK arrow or \ FWD (forward)
button.
• To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow
or s REV (reverse) button. You can also turn
the f (tune) knob, located on the upper right side
of the radio, to adjust the selected setting.
The date does not automatically display. To see the
date press the H (clock) button while the radio is
on. The date with display times out after a few seconds
and goes back to the normal radio and time display.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour, press the H button and then the pushbutton
located under the forward arrow label. Once the
time 12H and 24H are displayed, press the pushbutton
located under the desired option to select the default.
Press the H button again to apply the selected default,
or let the screen time out.
Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3)
This type of radio has a MENU button instead of
the H button to set the time and date.
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN. Press the O knob, located in
the center of the radio, to turn the radio on.
2. Press the MENU button. Once the clock option is
displayed.
3. Press the pushbutton located under that label.
The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.
3-69
4. Press the pushbutton located under any one of
the labels that you want to change. Every time the
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date if
selected, increases by one.
• Another way to increase the time or date,
is to press the right ¨ SEEK arrow
or \ FWD button.
• To decrease the time or date, press the
left © SEEK arrow or s REV button, or turn
the f knob, located on the upper right side of the
radio.
The date does not automatically display. To see the
date press the MENU button and then the H button
while the radio is on. The date with display times
out after a few seconds and goes back to the normal
radio and time display.
3-70
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year, follow these
instructions:
1. Press the H button and then the pushbutton
located under the forward arrow label. Once the time
12H and 24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month,
day, and year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and
year) displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option.
3. Press the H or MENU button again to apply the
selected default, or let the screen time out.
Radio(s)
Radio with CD and DVD (MP3)
Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Base Radio with CD
and Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3) similar
Your vehicle has one of these radios as its audio system.
If your vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system, it has a CD/DVD radio. See Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-101 for
more information on the vehicle’s RSE system.
The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate. The
player can read the DTS programmed DVD Audio or DVD
Video media (DTS and DTS 2.0 are trademarks of Digital
Theater Systems Inc.).
Dolby® is manufactured under license from
Dolby® Laboratories. Dolby® and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby® Laboratories.
3-71
Radio Data System (RDS)
Your vehicle’s audio system may have Radio Data
System (RDS). The RDS feature is available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information. This
system relies upon receiving specific information from
these stations and only works when the information is
available. While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station,
the station name or call letters appear on the display.
In rare cases, a radio station may broadcast incorrect
information that causes the radio features to work
improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume):
Press to turn the system on
and off.
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the volume.
3-72
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Your vehicle’s
audio system may also have Speed Compensated
Volume (SCV). While SCV is on, the radio volume
automatically adjusts to compensate for road and
wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows down.
That way, the volume level should sound about
the same while driving. To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM
(automatic volume) label on the radio display.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to switch between AM, FM, or
XM (if equipped). The selection displays.
f (Tune):
Turn to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press the arrows to go to the previous
or to the next station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for a
few seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to
a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next
station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
4 (Information) (Base Radio with CD): Press to switch
the display between the radio station frequency and the
time. When the ignition is off, press to display the time.
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,
MP3/WMA, and RDS Features): Press to display
additional text information related to the current FM-RDS
or XM station, or MP3/WMA song. A choice of
additional information such as: Channel, Song, Artist,
and CAT (category) can appear. Continue pressing
to highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
positioned under any one of the labels and the
information about that label displays.
When information is not available, No Info displays.
Setting Preset Stations
If the radio does not have XM™, up to 18 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM) can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing
the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for three seconds until a beep sounds.
When that pushbutton is pressed and released,
the station that was set, returns.
5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for each pushbutton.
3-73
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to your
favorite stations using the presets, favorites button,
and steering wheel controls, if your vehicle has them.
See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.
If your radio has XM, a maximum of 36 stations can
be programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons
positioned below the radio station frequency labels and
by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button).
FAV (Favorites): Press the FAV button to go through
up to six pages of favorites, each having six favorite
stations available per page. Each page of favorites can
contain any combination of AM, FM, or XM (if equipped)
stations. To store a station as a favorite, perform the
following steps:
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where the
station is to be stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a
beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed
and released, the station that was set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station
to be stored as a favorite.
3-74
The number of favorites pages can be setup using
the MENU button. To setup the number of favorites
pages, perform the following steps:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 label.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by
pressing the pushbutton located below the displayed
page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out,
to return to the original main radio screen showing
the radio station frequency labels and to begin
the process of programming your favorites for
the chosen amount of numbered pages.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
(Base Radio with CD)
EQ (Equalization): To adjust the bass or treble,
press the f knob or EQ button until the desired tone
control label displays. Turn the f knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the setting.
The display shows the current bass or treble level.
If a station’s frequency is weak, or if there is static,
decrease the treble.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the f knob
until the tone control labels display. Continue pressing
to highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
positioned under the desired label. Turn the f knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
setting. The highlighted setting can also be adjusted
by pressing the SEEK arrows, \ FWD (forward) or
s REV (reverse) button until the desired levels are
obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak, or if there is
static, decrease the treble.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds.
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle
position.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to
the middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
EQ (Equalization): Press to select preset equalization
settings.
To return to the manual mode, press the EQ button until
Manual displays or starts to manually adjust the bass,
midrange, or treble by pressing the f knob.
EQ (Equalization) (Radio with CD and DVD): Press
to choose bass and treble equalization settings designed
for different types of music. Your choices are pop, rock,
country, talk, jazz, and classical. Selecting MANUAL or
changing bass or treble, returns the EQ to the manual
bass and treble settings.
Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.
If your radio has a Bose® audio system, your EQ
settings are either MANUAL or TALK.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
(Base Radio with CD)
` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
or fade, press the ` button or the f knob until the
desired speaker control label displays. Turn the f knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the setting.
3-75
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or fade,
press the f knob until the speaker control labels display.
Continue pressing to highlight the desired label, or press
the pushbutton positioned under the desired label. Turn
the f knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the
highlighted setting. You can also adjust the highlighted
setting by pressing the SEEK arrows, \ FWD,
or s REV button until the desired levels are obtained.
If the radio has XM, the CAT button can be used to find
XM stations when the radio is in the XM mode.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or FADE
label for more than two seconds. A beep sounds and the
level adjusts to the middle position.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the
middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
CAT (Category): To find XM channels within a desired
category, perform the following:
1. Press the BAND button until the XM frequency is
displayed. Press the CAT button to display the
category labels on the radio display. Continue
pressing the CAT button until the desired category
name displays.
• Depending on the radio, another way to navigate
the category list is to press the s REV button
or the \ FWD button.
2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired
category label to immediately tune to the first XM
station associated with that category.
3. Turn the f knob, press the buttons below the right
or left arrows displayed, or press the Seek arrows
to go to the previous or to the next XM station within
the selected category.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the
FAV button or BAND button to display your
favorites again.
3-76
Undesired XM categories can be removed through
the setup menu. To remove an undesired category,
perform the following:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the XM CAT
label.
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If Calibration
Error displays, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for your vehicle and it must be
returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
3. Turn the f knob to display the category to be
removed.
Loc or Locked: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.
Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove
label until the category name along with the word
Removed displays.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Removed categories can be restored by pressing
the pushbutton under the Add label when a removed
category displays or by pressing the pushbutton
under the Restore All label.
The radio does not let you remove or add categories
while the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you
subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM Radio
Online for when you are not in your vehicle. A service
fee is required to receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca
or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
3-77
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 3-100 later in this
section for further detail.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears on the
CD. As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
LOAD ^: Press to load CDs into the CD player.
This CD player holds up to six CDs.
Care of Your CDs
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Press and release the
^ button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the ^ button for two seconds.
A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
3. Press the ^ button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
3-78
If playing a CD, the sound quality can be reduced due to
CD quality, the method of recording, the quality of the
music that has been recorded, and the way the CD has
been handled. Handle them carefully. Store CD(s) in their
original cases or other protective cases and away from
direct sunlight and dust. The CD and DVD player scans
the bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD
does not play properly or not at all. Do not touch the
bottom side of a CD while handling it; this could damage
the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or
the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth
or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make sure the
wiping process starts from the center to the edge.
Care of Your CD and DVD Player
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player
mechanism.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
Z EJECT (Base Radio with CD):
Press to eject the
CD. If the CD is not removed, after several seconds,
the CD automatically pulls back into the player.
Z EJECT:
Press to eject CD(s). To eject the CD
that is currently playing, press and release this button.
A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays.
Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays.
The CD can be removed. If the CD is not removed,
after several seconds, the CD automatically pulls back
into the player and begins playing.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold for
two seconds to eject all discs.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
playing.
© SEEK ¨:
Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either
arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through the
tracks on the CD.
s REV (Fast Reverse):
Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
3-79
RDM (Random) (Base Radio with CD): With the
random setting, CD tracks can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order. To use random, do the
following:
1. Press to play tracks from the CD in random order.
The random icon displays.
2. Press again to turn off random play. The random
icon disappears from the display.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, tracks
can be listened to in random, rather than sequential
order, on one CD or all CDs in a six-disc CD player.
To use random, do one of the following:
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CD
player, insert a disc partway into the slot of the CD
player. A RDM label displays.
To play the tracks from the single CD in random
order, press the pushbutton positioned under the
RDM label until Random Current Disc displays.
Press the pushbutton again to turn off random play.
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CD
player, press and hold the ^ button. A beep sounds
and Load All Discs displays. Insert one or more discs
partway into the slot of the CD player.
3-80
To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
RPT (Repeat) (Base Radio with CD): With the repeat
setting, one track can be repeated.
• To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. An arrow symbol displays.
Press again to turn off repeat play. When repeat
is off, the arrow symbol no longer displays.
4 (Information) (Base Radio with CD):
Press to
switch the display between the track number, elapsed
time of the track, and the time. When the ignition is
off, press to display the time.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The CD remains safely inside the radio for
future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing disc and/or track number displays when
a CD is in the player. Press again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
such as a portable audio player.
Playing a CD (In Either the DVD or
CD Slot)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing
(loading a disc into the system, depending on media
type and format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD,
and up to 30 seconds for a DVD to begin playing).
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in
the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. The CD
is controlled by the buttons on the radio faceplate. The
DVD/CD decks, (upper slot is the DVD deck and the
lower slot is the CD deck) of the radio are compatible
with most audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3s/WMAs.
When a CD is inserted, the text label DVD or CD
symbol appears on the left side of the radio display.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
Z CD (Eject):
Press and release to eject the CD that
is currently playing in the bottom slot. A beep sounds
and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed.
If the CD is not removed, after several seconds,
the CD automatically pulls back into the player.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed,
such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject,
press and hold for more than five seconds to force
the disc to eject.
Z DVD (Eject):
Press and release to eject the CD
that is currently playing in the top slot. A beep sounds
and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed.
If the CD is not removed, after several seconds,
the CD automatically pulls back into the player.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed,
such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject,
press and hold for more than five seconds to force
the disc to eject.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
playing.
© SEEK ¨:
Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than five seconds have played.
If less than five seconds have played, the previous track
plays. Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If
either arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through the tracks
on the CD.
3-81
s REV (Fast Reverse):
Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, tracks can
be listened to in random, rather than sequential order.
To play the tracks from the CD, press the DVD/CD AUX
button when not sourced to the CD, or insert a disc
partway into the slot. A RDM label displays. Press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random
Current Disc displays. Press the pushbutton again to turn
off random play.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD or DVD
is playing. The CD or DVD remains inside the radio
for future listening or viewing entertainment.
3-82
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to cycle through DVD,
CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio. The DVD/CD
text label and a message showing track or chapter
number displays when a disc is in either slot. Press again
and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary
input device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device”
displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two sources
and does not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a front
auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX button
cycles through all available options, such as: DVD slot,
CD slot, Front AUX, and Rear AUX (if available). See
“Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-101,
“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” for more information.
If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear seat
operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote
control to navigate the CD (tracks only) through the
remote control.
Audio Output
CD Messages
Only one audio source can be heard through the
speakers at one time. An audio source is defined as
DVD slot, CD slot, XM, FM/AM, Front Aux Jack, or Rear
Aux Jack.
If these messages display and/or the CD comes out,
it could be for one of the following reasons:
Press the O button to turn the radio on. The radio can
be heard through all of the vehicle speakers.
Front seat passengers can listen to the radio (AM, FM,
or XM) by pressing the BAND button or the DVD/CD AUX
button to select CD slot, DVD slot, front or rear auxiliary
input (if available).
If a playback device is plugged into the radio’s front
auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack, the front seat
passengers is able to listen to playback from this source
through the vehicle speakers. See “Using the Auxiliary
Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-101,
“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” for more information.
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW Disc
If you have a radio with a single CD (MP3/WMA), a
six-disc CD (MP3/WMA), or a radio with a CD and DVD
player, it is capable of playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW disc. For more information on how to play
an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc, see “Using
an MP3” in the index.
Optical Error: If the disc was inserted upside down.
Disk Read Error: If a disc was inserted with an invalid
or unknown format.
Player Error: If there are disc
problems.
^ or disc Z
CHECK DISC: If this error message displays, it could
be for one of the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide
it to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
3-83
Using the DVD Player
Playing a DVD
The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on the
remote control, by the RSA system, or by the buttons
on the radio faceplate. See “Remote Control”, under
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-101
for more information.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to cycle through DVD,
CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio. The DVD/CD
text label and a message showing track or chapter
number displays when a disc is in either slot. Press again
and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary
input device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device”
displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two sources
and does not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a front
auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX button
cycles through all available options, such as: DVD slot,
CD slot, Front AUX, and Rear AUX (if available). See
“Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-101,
“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” for more information.
The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the
appropriate region code that is printed on the jacket of
most DVDs.
The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most
audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio,
DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media along with MP3
and WMA formats.
If an error message appears on the video screen or
the radio, see “DVD Display Error Messages” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-101
and “DVD Radio Error Messages” in this section for
more information.
3-84
O (Power): Press to turn the radio on or off. Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease
the volume. Press and hold for more than two seconds
turns off the entire radio and Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system and starts the parental control feature
which prevents the rear seat occupant from operating
the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system or remote control.
SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to
go to the next track or chapter. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
s REV (Fast Reverse):
Press to fast reverse the
CD or DVD, five times the normal speed. The radio
displays the elapsed time while in fast reverse. To stop
fast reversing, press again. This button might not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the
previews.
A lock symbol appears next to the clock display.
The parental control feature remains on until a
subsequent press and hold of the power button is
performed (more than two seconds), or until the
driver turns the ignition off and exits the vehicle.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
f (Tune): Turn to change tracks on a CD or DVD, to
manually tune a radio station, or to change clock or date
settings, while in the clock or date setting mode. See
the information given earlier in this section specific to the
radio, CD, and the DVD. Also, see Setting the Time
on page 3-68, for setting the clock and date.
Z (Eject):
© SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press to return
to the start of the current track or chapter. Press again to
go to the previous track or chapter. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
Press to fast forward the
CD or DVD. The radio displays the elapsed time and
fast forwards five times the normal speed. To stop fast
forwarding, press again. This button might not work when
the DVD is playing the copyright information or the
previews.
Press to eject a CD or DVD. If a CD or
DVD is ejected, but not removed, the player automatically
pulls it back in after 15 seconds.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed, such
as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject, press
and hold for more than five seconds to force the disc
to eject.
3-85
DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons
Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menu
shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press the
pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during
DVD playback. See the tag options listed below for
more information.
The rear seat passenger navigates the DVD-V menus
and controls through the remote control. See “Remote
Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System on page 3-101 for more information. The Video
Screen automatically turns on when the DVD-V is
inserted into the DVD slot.
r / j (Play/Pause):
Press either play or pause
displayed on the radio system, to toggle between pausing
or restarting playback of a DVD. If the forward arrow is
showing on the display, the system is in pause mode.
If the pause icon is showing on the display, the system
is in playback mode. If the DVD screen is off, press this
button to turn the screen on.
Some DVDs begin playing after the previews have
finished, although there might be a delay of up to
30 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playing the movie
3-86
automatically, press the pushbutton located under the
play/pause symbol tag displayed on the radio. If the DVD
still does not play, refer to the on-screen instructions, if
available.
c (Stop):
Press to stop playing, rewinding, or fast
forwarding a DVD.
r (Enter):
Press to select the choices that are
highlighted in any menu.
y (Menu):
Press to access the DVD menu. The DVD
menu is different on every DVD. Use the pushbuttons
located under the navigation arrows to navigate
the cursor through the DVD menu. After making a
selection press the enter button. This button only
operates when using a DVD.
Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for
navigating through the menus.
q (Return):
Press to exit the current active menu
and return to the previous menu. This button operates
only when a DVD is playing and a menu is active.
DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons
Once a DVD-A is inserted, a radio display menu
shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press the
pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during
DVD playback. See the tag options listed below for more
information.
The rear seat operator navigates the DVD-A menus
and controls through the remote control. See “Remote
Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System
on page 3-101 for more information. The Video Screen
does not automatically power on when the DVD-A is
inserted into the DVD slot. It must be manually turned on
by the rear seat occupant through the remote control
power button.
r / j (Play/Pause):
Press either play or pause
displayed on the radio system, to toggle between pausing
or restarting playback of a DVD. If the forward arrow is
showing on the display, the system is in pause mode.
If the pause icon is showing on the display, the system
is in playback mode.
q Group r: Press to cycle through musical
groupings on the DVD-A disc.
Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for
navigating through the menus.
e (Audio Stream):
Press to cycle through audio
steam formats located on DVD-A disc. There is not
any type of notification for the customer to see through
the radio display, but video screen has a text field
that shows audio stream changing.
Inserting a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label side
up, into the loading slot. The DVD player might not accept
some paper labeled media. The player starts loading the
disc into the system and display “Loading Disc” on the
radio display. At the same time, the radio displays a
softkey menu of option(s). Some discs automatically
play the movie while others default to the softkey menu
display which requires the Play, Enter, or Navigation
softkeys to be pressed (either by softkey or by the rear
seat passenger using the remote control).
Loading a disc into the system, depending on media
type and format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD,
and up to 30 seconds for a DVD.
3-87
Stopping and Resuming Playback
Ejecting a Disc
To stop playing a DVD without turning off the system,
press the c button on the remote control, or press
the pushbutton located under the stop or the play/pause
symbol tags displayed on the radio. If the radio head
is sourced to something other than DVD-V, press
the DVD/CD AUX button to make DVD-V the active
source.
Press the Z button on the radio to eject the disc.
If a disc is ejected from the radio, but not removed,
the radio reloads the disc after a short period of time.
The disc is stored in the radio. The radio does not
resume play of the disc automatically. If the RSA system
is sourced to the DVD, the movie when reloaded into
the DVD player begins to play again. In case loading
and reading of a DVD or CD cannot be completed
(unknown format, etc.), and the disc fails to eject, press
and hold the Z DVD button more than 5 seconds
to force the disc to eject.
To resume DVD playback, press the play/pause button
on the remote control, or press the pushbutton located
under the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the radio.
The DVD should resume play from where it last stopped if
the disc has not been ejected and the stop button has not
been pressed twice on the remote control. If the disc has
been ejected or the stop button has been pressed twice
on the remote control, the disc resumes playing at the
beginning of the disc.
DVD Radio Error Messages
Player Error: This message displays when there are
disc load or eject problems.
Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the disc
is inserted with the disc label wrong side up, or if
the disc is damaged.
Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the disc
is not from a correct region.
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no disc
is present when the Z or DVD/CD AUX button
is pressed on the radio.
3-88
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on
the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an
audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the
front auxiliary input jack. An external audio device such
as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD changer,
etc. can be connected to the auxiliary input jack for
use as another source for audio listening.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See Defensive Driving
on page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over
the vehicle speakers.
O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume
of the portable player. Additional volume adjustments
might need to be made from the portable device if
the volume does not go loud or soft enough.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when a
portable audio device is playing. Press again and the
system begins playing audio from the connected portable
audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected,
No Input Device Found or No Aux may display.
DVD/CD AUX (CD/Auxiliary) (Radio with CD and
DVD): Press to cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary
while listening to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and
a message showing track or chapter number displays
when a disc is in either slot. Press again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such
as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays. If a disc is
in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX
button cycles between the two sources and does not
indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a front auxiliary device
is connected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all
available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front AUX,
and Rear AUX (if available). See “Using the Auxiliary
Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-101, “Audio/
Video (A/V) Jacks” for more information.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device
continues playing, so you might want to stop it or
power it off.
3-89
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or
Six-Disc CD Player)
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio plays MP3 and WMA files that were recorded
on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded
with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,
56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,
128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and
320 kbps or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name,
and album are displayed by the radio when recorded
using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
Compressed Audio
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA
files. By default the radio reads only the uncompressed
audio and ignores the MP3/WMA files. Pressing the
CAT (category) button toggles between compressed
and uncompressed audio format.
MP3/WMA Format
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal
computer:
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on
one disc.
• The CD player is able to read and play a maximum
of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up
to 8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate
a particular folder during playback.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension
(other file extensions might not work).
3-90
• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders, or
playlists can cause the player to be unable to play up
to the maximum number of files, folders, playlists, or
sessions. If you wish to play a large number of files,
folders, playlists, or sessions, minimize the length of
the file, folder, or playlist name. Long names also
take up more space on the display and might not
fully display.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc can cause the disc not
to function in the player.
Playlists can be changed by using S c (previous)
and c T (next) folder buttons, the f knob, or
the SEEK arrows. An MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW
that was recorded using no file folders can also be
played. If a CD-R CD-RW contains more than the
maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files, the
player lets you access and navigate up to the maximum,
but all items over the maximum are not accessible.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as a
folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files,
the directory displays as F1 ROOT. All files contained
directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always
accessed before root folders or files.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and
no compressed files directly beneath them, the
player advances to the next folder in the file structure
that contains compressed audio files. The empty
folder does not display.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions are not displayed on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then go to the root folder.
When the radio displays the name of the folder, the
radio displays ROOT.
3-91
Order of Play
File System and Naming
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in
the following order:
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder
and continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder has
played, play continues from the first track of the
first folder.
When play enters a new folder, the display does
not automatically show the new folder name unless
the folder mode was chosen as the default display.
The new track name displays.
3-92
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename displays.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
Playing an MP3/WMA
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot (Single CD
Player), or press the ^ button and wait for the message
to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label side up. The
player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW should begin
playing.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or
CD-RW in the player, it stays in the player. When the
ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R or CD-RW starts
to play where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title displays.
Z EJECT:
Press this button to eject CD-R(s) or
CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently
playing, press and release this button. A beep sounds
and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can be
removed. If the CD-R is not removed, after several
seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW automatically pulls
back into the player and begins playing.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold this button for
two seconds to eject all discs.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
the start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more than
ten seconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrow to
go to the next MP3/WMA file. If either SEEK arrow is held
or pressed multiple times, the player continues moving
backward or forward through MP3/WMA files on the CD.
Sc (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track
in the previous folder.
cT (Next Folder):
Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder label to go to the first track in the
next folder.
s REV (Reverse):
Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this
button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press and hold this button
to advance playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this button
to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file
displays.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA files on
the CD-R or CD-RW currently playing.
3-93
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3 files
on the CD-R can be listened to in random, rather than
sequential order, on one CD-R/CD-RW or all discs in
a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one of the
following:
1. To play MP3/WMA files from the CD-R or CD-RW
in random order, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label until Random Current Disc
displays. Press the same pushbutton again to turn
off random play.
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again
to turn off random play.
h (Music Navigator):
Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R or CD-RW in order
by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located below
the music navigator label. The player scans the disc to
sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information.
It can take several minutes to scan the disc depending on
the number of MP3/WMA files recorded to the CD-R or
CD-RW. The radio can begin playing while it is scanning
the disc in the background. When the scan is finished,
the CD-R or CD-RW begins playing again.
3-94
Once the disc has been scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The current
artist playing is shown on the second line of the display
between the arrows. Once all songs by that artist are
played, the player moves to the next artist in alphabetical
order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3
files by that artist. If you want to listen to MP3/WMA files
by another artist, press the pushbutton located below
either arrow button. The CD goes to the next or previous
artist in alphabetical order. Continue pressing either
button until the desired artist displays.
To change from playback by artist to playback by album,
press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label.
From the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the
album button. Press the pushbutton below the back label
to return to the main music navigator screen. Now the
album name is displayed on the second line between the
arrows and songs from the current album begins to play.
Once all songs from that album are played, the player
moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the
CD-R/CD-RW and begin playing MP3/WMA files from
that album.
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA
playback.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio
for future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing disc and/or track number displays when a CD is
in the player. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such
as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Input Device Found” displays.
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and
DVD Player)
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA
files depending on which slot the disc is loaded into.
By default the radio reads only the uncompressed audio
(.CDA) and ignores the MP3/WMA files on the DVD
deck. On the CD deck, pressing the CAT (category)
button toggles between compressed and uncompressed
audio format, the default being the uncompressed
format (.CDA).
MP3/WMA Format
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal
computer:
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on
one disc.
• The CD player (lower slot) is able to read and play
a maximum combination of 512 files and folders.
The DVD player (upper slot) is able to read
255 folders, 15 playlists and 40 sessions.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up
to 8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate
a particular folder during playback.
• Make sure playlists have a .m3u, .wpl or .pls
extension, other file extensions might not work.
3-95
• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists can cause the player to be unable to
play up to the maximum number of files, folders,
playlists, or sessions. If you wish to play a
large number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions,
minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist
name. Long names also take up more space on
the display.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc can cause the disc
not to function in the player.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as a
folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files,
the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained
directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always
accessed before root folders or files.
3-96
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and
no compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions are not displayed on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then go to the root folder.
When the radio displays the name of the folder the
radio displays ROOT.
Order of Play
Preprogrammed Playlists
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in
the following order:
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder
and continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder has
played, play continues from the first track of the
first folder.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless you have
chosen the folder mode as the default display. The new
track name displays.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename does not display.
Playing an MP3 (In Either the DVD or
CD Slot)
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into either the top or
bottom slot, label side up. The player pulls it in, and
the CD-R or CD-RW should begin playing.
Depending on the format of the disc, a softkey menu
appears and allow navigation of the disc. The menu
reads left to right as RDM (Randomize song play order),
a Folder icon with left and right arrows (to move up or
down through available folders), a PL tag if the disc
has a Playlist available, and a Music Navigator tag.
If a Playlist tag is shown, toggling this key brings up a
Folder softkey only or the menu as previously described.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or
CD-RW in the player, it stays in the player. When the
ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R or CD-RW starts
to play where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title displays.
3-97
Z CD (Eject):
Press and release this button to eject
the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the bottom
slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the
disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or
CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW
automatically pulls back into the player.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed, such
as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject, press
and hold this button for more than five seconds to force
the disc to eject.
Z DVD (Eject):
Press and release this button to eject
the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the top
slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once
the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or
CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW
automatically pulls back into the player. If loading and
reading of a CD cannot be completed, such as unknown
format, etc., and the disc fails to eject, press and hold
this button for more than five seconds to force the disc
to eject.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA files on
the CD-R or CD-RW currently playing.
3-98
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
the start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more than
five seconds have played. If less than five seconds have
played, the previous MP3/WMA file plays. Press the right
SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3/WMA file. If either
SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through the
MP3/WMA files on the CD.
Sc (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track
in the previous folder.
cT (Next Folder):
Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder label to go to the first track in the
next folder.
s REV (Reverse):
Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this
button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of
the file displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press and hold this button
to advance playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this button
to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file
displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3/WMA
files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be played in random,
rather than sequential order. To play MP3/WMA files from
the CD-R or CD-RW you are listening to in random order,
press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label
until Random Current Disc displays. Press the same
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW
in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton
located below the music navigator label. The player
scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3
tag information. It can take several minutes to scan
the disc depending on the number of MP3/WMA files
recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW.
To cancel music navigator while the player is scanning,
press the pushbutton located below the music navigator
label or eject the disc.
The radio could begin playing while it is scanning the disc
in the background. When the scan is finished, the CD-R
or CD-RW begins playing again.
Once the disc has been scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The current
artist playing is shown on the second line of the display
between the arrows. If you want to listen to MP3/WMA
files by another artist, press the pushbutton located below
either arrow button. You will go to the next or previous
artist in alphabetical order. Continue pressing either
button until the desired artist is displayed.
To change from playback by artist to playback by album,
press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label.
From the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the
album button. Press the pushbutton below the back label
to return to the main music navigator screen. The album
name displays on the second line between the arrows
and songs from the current album begins to play. Once all
songs from that album are played, the player moves to
the next album in alphabetical order on the CD-R/CD-RW
and begins playing MP3/WMA files from that album.
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA
playback.
3-99
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD or a DVD is playing. The CD or DVD remains inside
the radio for future listening or viewing entertainment.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle
through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio.
The DVD/CD text label and a message showing track or
chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot.
Press this button again and the system automatically
searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable
audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected,
“No Aux Input Device” displays. If a disc is in both the
DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles
between the two sources and does not indicate “No Aux
Input Device”. If a front auxiliary device is connected, the
DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all available options,
such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front AUX, and Rear AUX
(if available). See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later
in this section, or Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System
on page 3-101 Rear Seat Entertainment System,
“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” for more information.
If a MP3/WMA is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear seat
operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote
control to navigate the CD (tracks only) through the
remote control.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly,
but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When you move into an open area, the signal
should return.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune to another channel.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel
is no longer assigned. Tune to another station.
If this station was one of the presets, choose another
station for that preset button.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
3-100
No Title Info: No song title information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working properly.
No CAT Info: No category information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working properly.
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
XM TheftLocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle
could have previously been in another vehicle.
For security purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be
swapped between vehicles. If this message appears
after having your vehicle serviced, check with your
dealer/retailer.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM Radio eight digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned
to channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have
a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have
a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
Navigation/Radio System
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
The navigation system has built-in features intended
to minimize driver distraction. Technology alone,
no matter how advanced, can never replace your
own judgment. See the Navigation System manual for
some tips to help you reduce distractions while driving.
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System
Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system. The RSE system works with the vehicle’s
audio system. The DVD player is part of the front radio.
The RSE system includes a radio with a DVD player, a
video display screen, audio/video jacks, two wireless
headphones, and a remote control. See Radio(s) on
page 3-71 for more information on the vehicle’s audio/
DVD system.
3-101
Parental Control
Headphones
The RSE system may have a Parental Control feature,
depending on which radio you have. To enable
Parental Control, press and hold the radio power button
for more than two seconds to stop all system features
such as: radio, video screen, RSA, DVD and/or CD.
While Parental Control is on, a padlock icon displays.
The RSE includes two sets of wireless headphones that
are only dedicated to this system. These headphones
are used to listen to the DVD radio or an auxiliary device
connected to the RCA jacks. The wireless headphones
have an ON/OFF switch and a volume control.
When the radio is turned back on, Parental Control
is unlocked.
Before You Drive
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only.
The driver cannot safely view the video screen
while driving and should not try to do so.
In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE
system might not work until the temperature is within
the operating range. The operating range for the RSE
system is above −4°F (−20°C) or below 140°F (60°C).
If the temperature of your vehicle is outside of this range,
heat or cool the vehicle until the temperature is within the
operating range of the RSE system.
To use the headphones, turn the switch to ON. An
indicator light located on the headphones illuminates.
If the light does not illuminate, the batteries might need
to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in
this section for more information. Switch the headphones
to OFF when not in use.
The infrared transmitters are located in the display
below the video screen. The headphones shut off
automatically to save the battery power if the RSE
system and RSA are shut off or if the headphones
are out of range of the transmitters for more than
three minutes. If you move too far forward or step out
of the vehicle, the headphones lose the audio signal.
To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the
volume control located on the right side.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs will not be covered by your warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
3-102
The foam ear pads attached to the headphones can
become worn or damaged if they are not handled or
stored properly. If the foam ear pads do become
damaged or worn out, the pads can be replaced
separately from the headphone set. It is not necessary
to replace the complete headphone set. The headphone
replacement foam ear pads can be ordered in pairs.
See your dealer/retailer for more information.
Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries on the headphones, do the
following:
1. Turn the screw to loosen the battery door located
on the left side of the headphones. Slide the
battery door open.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Replace the battery door and tighten the door
screw.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
The A/V jacks are located on the rear of the floor
console. The A/V jacks allow audio or video signals
to be connected from an auxiliary device such as
a camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system.
Adapter connectors or cables might be required to
connect the auxiliary device to the A/V jacks. Refer
to the manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.
The A/V jacks are color coded to match typical home
entertainment system equipment. The yellow jack (A)
is for the video input. The white jack (B) is for the left
audio input. The red jack is (C) for the right audio input.
Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the radio
system.
3-103
To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system, connect
an external auxiliary device to the color-coded A/V jacks
and turn both the auxiliary device and the video screen
power on. If the video screen is in the DVD player mode,
pressing the AUX button on the remote control switches
the video screen from the DVD player mode to the
auxiliary device. The radio can listen to the audio of
the connected auxiliary device by sourcing to auxiliary.
See Radio(s) on page 3-71 for more information.
Audio Output
How to Change the RSE Video Screen
Settings
The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to
the wireless headphones, if there is audio available.
See “Headphones” earlier in this section for more
information.
The screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom),
screen brightness, and setup menu language can be
changed from the on screen setup menu. To change
any feature, perform the following:
1. Press the
control.
z (display menu) button on the remote
2. Use the remote control menu n, q, p, o
(navigation) arrows and the r (enter) button
to use the setup menu.
3. Press the z button again to remove the setup
menu from the screen.
3-104
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may be
heard through the following possible sources:
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear seat
audio system, if your vehicle has this feature.
When a device is connected to the radio’s auxiliary
input jack, if your vehicle has this feature, or A/V jacks,
the rear seat passengers are able to hear audio
from the auxiliary device through the wireless or wired
headphones. The front seat passengers are able to
listen to playback from this device through the vehicle
speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio.
Video Screen
Remote Control
The video screen is located in the overhead console.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its
locked position.
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window at the rear of the RSE overhead console
and press the desired button. Direct sunlight or very
bright light can affect the ability of the RSE transmitter
to receive signals from the remote control. If the remote
control does not seem to be working, the batteries
may need to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement”
later in this section. Objects blocking the line of sight
can also affect the function of the remote control.
If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked
position, the screen remains on, this is normal, and the
DVD continues to play through the previous audio source.
Use the remote control O button or Z the disc to turn
off the screen.
If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot, the remote
control power button can be used to turn on the video
screen display and start the disc. The radio can also
turn on the video screen display. See Radio(s) on
page 3-71 for more information.
The overhead console contains the IR transmitters
for the wireless headphones and the IR receivers for
the remote control. They are located at the rear of
the console.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area
or in direct sunlight can damage it, and the repairs
will not be covered by your warranty. Storage in
extreme cold can weaken the batteries. Keep
the remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
To use the video screen, do the following:
1. Push the release button located on the overhead
console.
2. Move the screen to the desired position.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen,
as damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for more information.
3-105
Remote Control Buttons
y (Main Menu):
Press this button to access the DVD
menu. The DVD menu is different on every DVD.
Use the navigation arrows to move the cursor around
the DVD menu. After making a selection press the enter
button. This button only operates when using a DVD.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use
the navigation arrows to navigate through a menu.
r (Enter):
Press this button to select the choice that
is highlighted in any menu.
z (Display Menu):
Press this button to adjust the
brightness, screen display mode (normal, full, or zoom),
and display the language menu.
q (Return):
O (Power): Press this button to turn the video screen
on and off.
Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu. This
button operates only when the display menu or a DVD
menu is active.
P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the remote
control backlight on. The backlight automatically times
out after 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed
while the backlight is on.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD. Press this button twice to
return to the beginning of the DVD.
v (Title):
Press this button to start playing a
DVD. Press this button while a DVD is playing to
pause it. Press it again to continue playing the DVD.
Press this button to return the DVD to
the main menu of the DVD. This function varies for
each disc.
3-106
s (Play/Pause):
When the DVD is playing, depending on the radio, you
might be able to do slow play by pressing the play/pause
button then pressing the fast forward button. The DVD
continues playing in a slow play mode. You can also,
depending on the radio, perform reverse slow play by
pressing the play/pause button and then pressing the
fast reverse button. To cancel slow play mode, press this
button.
t (Previous Track/Chapter):
Press this button
to return to the start of the current track or chapter.
Press this button again to go to the previous track
or chapter. This button might not work when the DVD
is playing the copyright information or the previews.
u (Next Track/Chapter):
Press this button to go to
the beginning of the next chapter or track. This button
might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
r (Fast Reverse):
Press this button to fast reverse
the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing a DVD video,
press the play/pause button. To stop fast reversing a
DVD audio or CD, release the fast reverse button.
This button might not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the previews.
[ (Fast Forward):
Press this button to fast forward
the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding a DVD video,
press the play/pause button. To stop fast forwarding a
DVD audio or CD, release the fast forward button. This
button might not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
e (Audio):
Press this button to change audio tracks
on DVDs that have this feature when the DVD is playing.
The format and content of this function vary for each disc.
{ (Subtitles): Press this button to turn ON/OFF
subtitles and to move through subtitle options when a
DVD is playing. The format and content of this function
vary for each disc.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the system
between the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
d (Camera):
Press this button to change camera
angles on DVDs that have this feature when a DVD is
playing. The format and content of this function vary
for each disc.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides the capability of direct chapter or track
number selection.
3-107
\ (Clear):
Press this button within three seconds after
inputting a numeric selection, to clear all numeric inputs.
Problem
No power.
} 10 (Double Digit Entries):
Press this button
to select chapter or track numbers greater than 9.
Press this button before inputting the number.
If the remote control becomes lost or damaged, a
new universal remote control can be purchased. If this
happens, make sure the universal remote control uses a
code set of Toshiba®.
Battery Replacement
To change the remote control batteries, do the following:
1. Slide the rear cover back on the remote control.
The picture does not
fill the screen. There
are black borders on
the top and bottom or on
both sides or it looks
stretched out.
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
The remote control does
not work.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly,
using the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Replace the battery cover.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
3-108
After stopping the player, I
push Play but sometimes
the DVD starts where I left
off and sometimes at the
beginning.
Recommended Action
The ignition might not be
turned ON/RUN or in
ACC/ACCESSORY.
Check the display mode
settings in the setup menu
by pressing the display
menu button on the remote
control.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
Check to make sure there
is no obstruction between
the remote control and
the transmitter window.
Check the batteries to
make sure they are
not dead or installed
incorrectly.
If the stop button was
pressed one time, the
DVD player resumes
playing where the DVD
was stopped. If the stop
button was pressed two
times the DVD player
begins to play from the
beginning of the DVD.
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Check that the RSE video
screen is in the auxiliary
source mode.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
Sometimes the wireless
Check for obstructions,
headphone audio cuts out low batteries, reception
or buzzes.
range, and interference
from cellular telephone
towers or by using your
cellular telephone in
the vehicle.
Check that the
headphones are on
correctly using the L (left)
and R (right) on the
headphones.
I lost the remote and/or the See your dealer/retailer for
headphones.
assistance.
The DVD is playing, but
Check that the RSE video
there is no picture or
screen is sourced to the
sound.
DVD player.
DVD Display Error Messages
The DVD display error message depends on which
radio you have. The video screen can display one of
the following:
Disc Load/Eject Error: This message displays when
there are disc load or eject problems.
Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the disc
is inserted with the disc label wrong side up, or if
the disc is damaged.
Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the disc
is not from a correct region.
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no disc is
present when the Z button is pressed on the radio.
DVD Distortion
Video distortion may occur when operating cellular
phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player
when operating one of these devices in or near
the vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
3-109
Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console
When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface,
use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.
Cleaning the Video Screen
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth
dampened with clean water. Use care when directly
touching or cleaning the screen, as damage can result.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
may be different depending
on your vehicle’s options.
Some audio controls
can be adjusted at the
steering wheel. They
include the following:
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. It works by using a secret code to disable
all radio functions when battery power is removed and the
radio is placed in a different vehicle. This feature requires
no user input to be activated. The radio is automatically
armed when it is put into the vehicle for the first time.
If THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio does not operate
if stolen. The radio displays LOCKED. If this occurs,
the radio needs to be returned to your dealer/retailer.
+ − (Volume): Press the plus or minus volume buttons
to increase or to decrease the radio volume.
xw (Next/Previous): Press the arrows to go to the
next or to the previous radio station stored as a favorite.
When a CD is playing, press the arrows to go to the
next or to the previous track.
If your vehicle has OnStar®, press the down arrow
to end an OnStar® Hands-Free Call or the Advisor
Playback. It also cancels or hangs-up an incoming
Hands-Free Call.
3-110
g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and release to
silence the system. Press and release again, to turn the
sound on.
If your vehicle has the navigation system, press and
hold for longer than one second to initiate voice
recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the Navigation
System manual for more information.
If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and hold for longer
than one second to interact with the OnStar® system.
If your vehicle also has the Navigation System,
press this button to initiate voice recognition and say
“OnStar” to enter OnStar® mode. See the OnStar®
System on page 2-39 in this manual for more
information.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power
outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item
from the accessory power outlet.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on your radio.
3-111
FM Stereo
Multi-Band Antenna
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals only
reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings
or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the
sound to fade in and out.
The multi-band antenna is located on the roof of your
vehicle. This type of antenna is used with the AM/FM
radio, as well as OnStar® and the XM™ Satellite Radio
Service System, if your vehicle has these features. Keep
this antenna clear of snow and ice build up for clear radio
reception. If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance
of the radio system may be affected if the sunroof is
open. Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can
interfere with the performance of the radio system and,
if your vehicle has this feature, OnStar®. Make sure the
multi-band antenna is not obstructed.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In
addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or through tunnels could cause loss
of the XM signal for a period of time. The radio may
display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.
3-112
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunk Driving .................................................4-3
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-4
Braking .........................................................4-4
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................4-5
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-6
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-6
StabiliTrak® System ........................................4-7
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .........................4-8
Steering ........................................................4-9
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-12
Passing .......................................................4-12
Loss of Control .............................................4-12
Driving at Night ............................................4-14
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-15
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-16
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-16
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-17
Winter Driving ..............................................4-18
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice, or Snow .............................................4-21
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-22
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-22
Towing ..........................................................4-27
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-27
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-27
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-32
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-12.
{CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between
you and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause collisions
resulting in injury or possible death. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
4-2
Drunk Driving
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious —
or even fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking. Do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
4-3
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control your vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road can
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of your vehicle.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-33.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring
up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds
or more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do
alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths
of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h)
4-4
travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in
an emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, or
icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight of
the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do,
the pedal could get harder to push down. If the
engine stops, you will still have some power brake
assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the
power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start the engine and begin to drive away,
ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary
motor or clicking noise while this test is going on, and
you might even notice that the brake pedal moves
a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light will
stay on. See Antilock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-34.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
most of available tire and road conditions. This can
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle
in front of you, you will not have time to apply the
brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though
you have ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might hear
the antilock pump or motor operate, and feel the
brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.
4-5
Braking in Emergencies
Traction Control System (TCS)
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time. In
many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits
wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road
conditions. The system operates only if it senses that one
or more of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose
traction. When this happens, the system works the
brakes and reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
Panic Brake Assist
Your vehicle has a Panic Brake Assist feature designed
to assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle
speed in emergency driving conditions. This feature
uses the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) hydraulic
brake control module to supplement the power
brake system under conditions where the driver has
quickly and forcefully applied the brake pedal in
an attempt to quickly stop or slow down the vehicle. The
ESC hydraulic brake control module increases brake
pressure at each corner of the vehicle until the Antilock
Brake System (ABS) activates. Minor brake pedal
pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal
and the driver should continue to apply the brake
pedal as the driving situation dictates. The Panic Brake
Assist feature will automatically disengage when the
brake pedal is released or brake pedal pressure
is quickly decreased.
4-6
This light flashes while the
traction control system is
limiting wheel spin.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
normal. This light may also come on after extended
heavy braking indicating the brakes have become too
hot to limit wheel spin.
The traction control system automatically comes on
whenever the vehicle is started. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should always
leave the system on. But you can turn the traction control
system off if you ever need to. You should turn the
system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud,
ice, or snow and rocking the vehicle is required. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-22.
The traction control system
can be turned off by
pressing the traction
control button, located next
to the gear shift lever.
The traction control system can be activated again by
pressing the traction control button. While the traction
control system is activated, the traction control system
warning light on the instrument panel cluster comes
on and TRACTION CONTROL ON briefly displays.
If the system is limiting wheel spin when you press the
button, the traction control off light appears on the
instrument panel cluster. The system will not turn off
until there is no longer a current need to limit wheel spin.
Turn the system back on by pressing the button
again. If the light does not come on, traction control
might not be working and your vehicle should be
serviced by a dealer/retailer.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3 for more information.
When the traction control system is turned off, the
traction control warning light on the instrument panel
cluster comes on and TRACTION CONTROL OFF
briefly displays.
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle has this feature. The StabiliTrak® system
is an advanced computer controlled system that
helps the driver maintain directional control of the
vehicle in difficult driving conditions. This is
accomplished by selectively applying any one of the
vehicle’s brakes and reducing engine power. The
StabiliTrak® system comes on automatically whenever
you start your vehicle.
4-7
The STABILITRAK NOT READY message may be
displayed in the DIC and the traction control system and
StabiliTrak® warning light on the instrument panel
cluster will be on after first driving the vehicle and
exceeding 30 mph 48 (km/h) for 30 seconds. The
StabiliTrak® system is off until the light has turned off.
This could take up to 15 minutes. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-52 for more information.
The traction control system and StabiliTrak® warning
light on the instrument panel cluster will flash when the
system is operating. You may also feel or hear the
system working. This is normal. This light may
also come on after extended heavy braking indicating
the brakes have become too hot to limit wheel spin.
StabiliTrak® can be turned off using the traction control
button. To disable StabiliTrak®, press and hold the
traction control button for five seconds. StabiliTrak® can
be activated again by pressing the traction control button.
The SERVICE STABILITRAK message will be displayed
and the traction control system and StabiliTrak® warning
light on the instrument panel cluster will come on if there
is a problem with the system. When this light and the
SERVICE STABILITRAK message are on, the system is
not operational. Adjust your driving accordingly.
4-8
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
If your vehicle has all-wheel drive (AWD), the AWD
system operates automatically without any action
required by the driver. If the front drive wheels begin to
slip, the rear wheels will automatically begin to drive
the vehicle as required. Torque is also applied to
the rear wheels during launches. There may be a slight
engagement noise during hard use but this is normal.
This light is located on the
instrument panel cluster.
This light and the SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE
message in the DIC will come on and stay on to indicate
there may be a problem with the drive system and
service is required.
See Service All-Wheel Drive Light on page 3-42 and
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-52 for
more information.
This light will come on
along with the ALL
WHEEL DRIVE OFF
message when the rear
drive system is
overheating.
This light will turn off when the rear drive system cools
down. If this light stays on, it must be reset. To reset
the light, turn the ignition off and then back on again.
If the light stays on, see your dealer/retailer for service.
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction several
times until it stops, or hold the steering wheel in the
stopped position for an extended amount of time, you
may notice a reduced amount of power steering
assist. The normal amount of power steering assist
should return shortly after a few normal steering
movements.
The electric power steering system does not require
regular maintenance. If you suspect steering system
problems, such as abnormally high steering effort for a
prolonged period of time, contact your dealer/retailer
for service repairs.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-52 for
more information.
Hydraulic Power Steering
(3.6L V6 Engine)
Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the power steering system is not functioning,
you can steer, but it will take much more effort.
Electric Power Steering
(3.4L V6 Engine)
If the engine stalls while you are driving, the power
steering assist system will continue to operate until you
are able to stop your vehicle. If you lose power
steering assist because the electric power steering
system is not functioning, you can steer, but it will take
more effort.
4-9
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve. Then
you suddenly accelerate. Both control systems —
steering and acceleration — have to do their work where
the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden acceleration
can demand too much of those places. You can lose
control. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6
and StabiliTrak® System on page 4-7.
4-10
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions.
Under less favorable conditions you will want to
go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while the
front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply the brakes. See Braking on
page 4-4. It is better to remove as much speed as
you can from a possible collision. Then steer around
the problem, to the left or right depending on the
space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-11
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your vehicle’s right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you are driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing,
we suggest the following tips:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass. If
in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
4-12
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are
not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If your traction system is off,
then an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing
your foot off the accelerator pedal. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-6 and StabiliTrak®
System on page 4-7.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-13
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because your headlamps can only
light up so much road ahead.
4-14
•
•
•
•
•
Watch for animals.
When tired, pull off the road.
Do not wear sunglasses.
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But,
as we get older, these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
drive slower in these types of driving conditions
and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work normally.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. Driving through flowing water could
cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warnings
and be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
4-15
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
•
•
•
•
•
Allow extra following distance.
Pass with caution.
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-52.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Things to check on your own include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
clean — inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
4-16
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have up-to-date
maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Other driving tips include:
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
• Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have the engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
4-17
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You might want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-52.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and the
road, you can have a very slippery situation. You have a
lot less traction, or grip, and need to be very careful.
4-18
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it can offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Traction control improves your ability to accelerate when
driving on a slippery road. But you can turn the
traction system off if you ever need to. You should turn
the traction system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck
in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck
in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-21. Even
though your vehicle has a traction system, slow down
and adjust your driving to the road conditions. Under
certain conditions, you might want to turn the traction
system off, such as when driving through deep
snow and loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle motion
at lower speeds. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-6 and StabiliTrak® System on page 4-7.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement.
See Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-5.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead
of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you are actually on the ice, and avoid
sudden steering maneuvers.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches can appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such
as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve
4-19
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking the exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
the headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
4-20
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free your
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-22.
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. The vehicle can overheat,
causing an engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible
and avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-75.
If your vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to your vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If the stuck condition is too severe
for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the rocking method.
4-21
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear
the area around the front wheels. Turn off any
traction or stability system. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-6 and StabiliTrak® System on
page 4-7. Then shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. To prevent transmission wear,
wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears.
Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and
press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the
transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels in
the forward and reverse directions, you will cause a
rocking motion that could free your vehicle. If that does
not get your vehicle out after a few tries, it might
need to be towed out. If your vehicle does need to be
towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-27.
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. Two labels on your vehicle
show how much weight it may properly carry, the
Tire and Loading Information label and the
Vehicle Certification label.
4-22
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also lists
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation, see
Tires on page 5-52 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-59.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles. See
“Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find
the label attached below the door lock post
(striker). The tire and loading information label lists
the number of occupant seating positions (A),
and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds. The vehicle capacity weight
includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and
all nonfactory-installed options.
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4-23
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity for your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 4-32 for important information
on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and
trailering tips.
4-24
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
Example 2
Item
A
B
C
Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Example 3
Total
Item
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
750 lbs (340 kg)
B
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
maximum vehicle capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.
4-25
Certification Label
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh station and
weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on
both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
{CAUTION:
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found
on the rear edge of the driver’s door, or on
the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar).
The label shows the size of your original tires and
the inflation pressures needed to obtain the
gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The
GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, and cargo.
4-26
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else —
they will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have
to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,
they will keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
4-27
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on
page 4-16.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all of its
wheels on the ground. If you have a two-wheel-drive
vehicle, it can be towed with two of its wheels on
the ground. See “Dolly Towing” following. If you have an
all-wheel-drive vehicle, it cannot be towed with any of
its wheels on the ground. It can be towed with the
car carrier equipment.
Dinghy Towing (Vehicles with
6-speed Transmission)
If you have a front-wheel-drive vehicle, it can be dinghy
towed from the front. These vehicles may also be
towed by putting the front wheels on a dolly. See “Dolly
Towing” later in this section.
Dinghy Towing (Vehicles with
5-speed Transmission)
If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, it can be dinghy
towed from the front. You can also tow these vehicles
by placing them on a platform trailer with all four wheels
off of the ground. These vehicles cannot be towed
using a dolly.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
For vehicles being dinghy towed, the vehicle should be
run at the beginning of each day and at each RV
fuel stop for about five minutes. This will ensure proper
lubrication of transmission components. Re-connect
the vehicle’s battery to start the vehicle.
4-28
Notice: If you tow your vehicle without performing
each of the steps listed under “Dinghy Towing,”
you could damage the automatic transmission. Be
sure to follow all steps of the dinghy towing
procedure prior to and after towing your vehicle.
Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while
towing your vehicle, it could be damaged. Never
exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing your vehicle.
Once you have reached your destination:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
To tow your vehicle from the front with all four wheels
on the ground:
1. Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it.
2. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.
5. Shift your transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
6. To prevent your battery from draining while the
vehicle is being towed, disconnect the vehicle’s
battery. Contact your dealer/retailer for more
information on the battery disconnection procedure.
7. Release the parking brake.
3. Re-connect the vehicle’s battery. Contact your
dealer/retailer for more information on the battery
connection procedure.
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF and remove the
key from the ignition.
Notice: Don’t tow a vehicle with the front drive
wheels on the ground if one of the front tires is a
compact spare tire. Towing with two different
tire sizes on the front of the vehicle can cause
severe damage to the transmission.
4-29
Dolly Towing (Vehicles with
5-speed Transmission)
Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
with 6-speed Transmission)
If you have a two-wheel-drive vehicle, it can be towed
with two of its wheels on the ground. To dolly tow
your vehicle:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
5. Release the parking brake.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, it cannot be
towed with any of its wheels on the ground. It can be
towed with car carrier equipment.
4-30
All-wheel-drive vehicles must not be towed with two
wheels on the ground. To properly tow these vehicles,
they should be placed on a platform trailer with all
four wheels off of the ground or dinghy towed from
the front.
Dolly Towing (Front-Wheel-Drive
Vehicles with 6-speed Transmission)
To tow your front-wheel-drive vehicle from the front with
two wheels on the ground:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Move the shift lever to PARK (P).
Towing Your Vehicle From the Rear
Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by
the warranty. Never have your vehicle towed
from the rear.
Do not tow your vehicle from the rear.
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
5. Release the parking brake.
4-31
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and
information about towing a trailer with your
vehicle.
4-32
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the instructions in this section and check with your
dealer/retailer for more information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. Trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability,
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That is the reason for this section. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
Weight of the Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you will be driving. A good source
for this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later in
this section.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven.
Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
• During the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This
helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle
wear in at the heavier loads.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• Weight of the trailer
• Weight of the trailer tongue
• Weight on your vehicle’s tires
Your vehicle can tow up to 3,500 lbs (1 575 kg). But
even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. It can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle,
and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this
section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information or
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance
Offices. See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-5
for more information.
4-33
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, passengers, or
cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight
your vehicle can carry, which will also reduce the trailer
weight your vehicle can tow. And if you will tow a
trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW
because your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22 for more
information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
If you are using a weight-carrying or a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle.
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
4-34
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Safety Chains
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You will find these numbers on the
Certification/Tire Label at the rear edge of the driver’s
door, or see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22.
Then be sure you do not go over the GVW limit for your
vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be
provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer
manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your rig. Never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you will need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
• If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg), be sure to use
a properly mounted, weight-carrying hitch and
sway control of the proper size. This equipment is
very important for proper vehicle loading and
good handling when you’re driving.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you do, remember to seal the holes when you
remove the hitch. If you do not seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can
get into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-36. Dirt and water can, too.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you will be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
Because your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes, do not
try to tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do,
both brake systems will not work well, or at all.
4-35
Driving with a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you have the liftgate open and you pull a
trailer with your vehicle, carbon monoxide (CO)
could come into your vehicle. You cannot see
or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness or
death. See Engine Exhaust on page 2-36. To
maximize your safety when towing a trailer:
• Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
• Keep the liftgate closed.
• If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
the climate control setting for maximum air
because it only recirculates the air inside
your vehicle. See Climate Control System
on page 3-20.
4-36
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you will want to
get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Electronic Trailer Sway Control
Passing
Electronic Trailer Sway Control is integrated into the
StabiliTrak® system of your vehicle. This feature detects
the occurrence of trailer sway that may be caused by
improper trailer weight balance, or excessive vehicle
speed. When the system detects trailer sway, the
StabiliTrak® system may begin to apply the front brakes,
without you pressing the brake pedal, to help you in
stabilizing the vehicle. The StabiliTrak® warning light will
flash to indicate that you should reduce vehicle speed.
If the trailer sway continues, StabiliTrak® will reduce
engine torque as a method to reduce the speed of the
vehicle. Reducing the speed of the vehicle is necessary
to reduce trailer sway. Electronic Trailer Sway Control
is de-activated when StabiliTrak® is turned off, and
is re-activated when it is turned back on. See
StabiliTrak® System on page 4-7.
You will need more passing distance up ahead when
you are towing a trailer. And, because you are a
good deal longer, you will need to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to
your lane.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you are turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer will not strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
4-37
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extra
wiring.
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you are about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you do not shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
If you are towing a trailer that weighs more than
1,000 lbs (450 kg), drive in INTERMEDIATE (I) instead
of DRIVE (D) or, as you need to, a lower gear. This
will minimize heat build-up and extend the life of your
transmission.
4-38
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, do the
following:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you do the following:
• Start your engine.
• Shift into a gear.
• Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you are
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for
more on this. Things that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid, engine
oil, belts, cooling system and brake system. Each of
these is covered in this manual, and the Index will help
you find them quickly. If you are trailering, it is a
good idea to review these sections before you start
your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-39
✍ NOTES
4-40
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-4
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....5-4
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle ..............................................5-5
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-6
California Fuel ...............................................5-6
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-15
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-18
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-20
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-22
Engine Coolant .............................................5-22
Engine Overheating .......................................5-25
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ........................................5-26
Cooling System ............................................5-27
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-32
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-33
Brakes ........................................................5-34
Battery ........................................................5-37
Jump Starting ...............................................5-38
All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-44
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-46
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-47
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-47
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps ....................................5-47
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps .........................................5-49
License Plate Lamp ......................................5-50
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-50
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-51
Tires ..............................................................5-52
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-53
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-56
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-59
High-Speed Operation ...................................5-61
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-62
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................5-63
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-67
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-69
Buying New Tires .........................................5-70
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-72
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-72
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-74
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-74
Tire Chains ..................................................5-75
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-76
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-76
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-78
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................5-79
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-86
Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-88
Appearance Care ............................................5-88
Interior Cleaning ...........................................5-88
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-90
Leather .......................................................5-91
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ..................................................5-92
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-92
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-92
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-93
5-2
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-93
Finish Care ..................................................5-94
Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-94
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim ..................................................5-95
Tires ...........................................................5-96
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-96
Finish Damage .............................................5-96
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-96
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-96
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-97
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-98
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-98
Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-98
Electrical System ............................................5-99
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-99
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-99
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-99
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........................5-100
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ...................5-102
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-105
Service
Accessories and Modifications
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered by warranty.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your GM
dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you
will know that GM-trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine GM
Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 1-70.
5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless entry transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may be
necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
should use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this manual
can. To order the proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-16.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-69.
5-4
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-16.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This can cause wind
noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield
washer performance. Check with your dealer/retailer
before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Gasoline Octane
If your vehicle has the 3.4L V6 engine (VIN Code F),
use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the
engine needs service.
If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine (VIN Code 7), use
regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of
87 or higher. For best performance or trailer towing, you
could choose to use middle grade 89 octane unleaded
gasoline. If the octane rating is less than 87, you might
notice an audible knocking noise when you drive,
commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs, use a
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.
If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and
you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs service.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 5-98.
5-5
Gasoline Specifications
Additives
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or
3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain an
octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines containing MMT. See
Additives on page 5-5 for additional information.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In
most cases, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations. To help
keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean, or if
your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors
or valves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your dealer/retailer has
additives that will help correct and prevent most
deposit-related problems.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance might be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and your vehicle might fail
a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-36. If this occurs, return to your authorized
dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined that
the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
might not be covered by your warranty.
5-6
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the
emission control system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
return to your dealer/retailer for service.
5-7
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle
while pumping fuel. Keep children away from
the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
5-8
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel
cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-93.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-36.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-36.
5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under the
Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the fuel vapor. You
can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
5-10
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located inside the
vehicle, to the left of
the brake pedal.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and move the
secondary hood release lever to the right.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 3.4L V6, here is what you will see:
5-12
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20.
B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
D. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brakes on page 5-34.
E. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 5-99.
F. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-38.
G. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-22.
H. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 5-33.
5-13
When you open the hood on the 3.6L V6, here is what you will see:
5-14
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20.
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Out of View). See
Power Steering Fluid on page 5-32.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Out of View). See “When to Add
Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
E. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under
Brakes on page 5-34.
F. Underhood Fuse Block. See Engine Compartment
Fuse Block on page 5-102.
G. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-38.
H. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System
on page 5-27.
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-33.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-15
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of
the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind of oil
to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-105.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
5-16
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
SAE 5W-30 may not
appear on all caps.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range in the cross-hatched area.
Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are
through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle. If you are in an area of extreme
cold, where the temperature falls below −20°F
(−29°C), it is recommended that you use either an
SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil.
Both will provide easier cold starting and better
protection for the engine at extremely low
temperatures.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
Look for three things:
• GM6094M
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. Look for and use only an oil
that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
5-17
Look for this information on the oil container, and use
only those oils that are identified as meeting GM
Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol on
the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you need for good performance and
engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
5-18
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A change engine oil light and a CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will come on. Change the
oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under
the best conditions, the oil life system might not indicate
that an oil change is necessary for over a year.
However, the engine oil and filter must be changed at
least once a year and at this time the system must
be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service people
who will perform this work using genuine parts and
reset the system. It is also important to check the oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last
oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change the oil prior
to a change engine oil light or CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message being turned on, reset the system.
1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal
three times within five seconds.
The change engine oil light will flash while the
system is resetting.
3. When the light stops flashing, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of used oil, ask your
dealer/retailer, a service station, or a local recycling
center for help.
If the light or message comes back on and stays on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-19
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
1. Turn off the engine.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If you
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.
5-20
2. Disconnect the air flow sensor electrical connector.
3. Loosen the screws on the clamps holding the air
outlet duct in place. Do not pry the clamps off.
7. Reinstall the filter cover and latch the clamps.
8. Reattach the air outlet duct and tighten the screws
on the clamps that hold the duct in place.
9. Reconnect the air flow sensor electrical connector.
{CAUTION:
4. Remove the air outlet duct.
5. Undo the clamps on the filter cover. To remove the
cover, pull up on the front and then pull the cover out.
6. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
Wipe all dust from inside of the housing and
inspect the air cleaner and air outlet duct for cracks,
cuts, and deterioration. The air outlet duct must
be replaced if damaged.
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to
stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is not
there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
5-21
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Engine Coolant
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to the
dealer/retailer and have it repaired as soon as possible.
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed to
remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sure
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
For the 3.6L engine, the transmission fluid will not
reach the end of the dipstick unless the transmission is
at operating temperature. If you need to check the
transmission fluid level, please take your vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-25.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-22
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. The
engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer/retailer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.
5-23
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the COLD
FILL line. When your engine is warm, the level should
be at the COLD FILL line or a little higher.
The surge tank is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location.
5-24
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-35. There are several
different types of engine overheating messages that may
be displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-52.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there
is no sign of steam or coolant before you open
the hood.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle
until the engine is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode on page 5-26 for information on driving to
a safe place in an emergency.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly
damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 5-26 for information on
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
5-25
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
An overheat warning can indicate a serious problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
•
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. If the air conditioner is on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
3. Try to minimize engine load. If you are in a traffic
jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift to the
highest gear while driving.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about ten minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
5-26
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see
“Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” later in
this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
This emergency operating mode lets your vehicle be
driven to a safe place in an emergency situation. If an
overheated engine condition exists, an overheat
protection mode which alternates firing groups of
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
there is a significant loss in power and engine
performance. The temperature gage indicates an
overheat condition exists. Driving extended distances
and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode
should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the
cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the oil
life system. See Engine Oil on page 5-15.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing, and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do
not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
B. Coolant Surge Tank
5-27
The coolant level should be at the COLD FILL line. If it
is not, you may have a leak at the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.
Turn off the engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on
page 5-26 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
5-28
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Always
use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at the COLD FILL line, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the
cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap, is cool before you do it.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait
for the cooling system and coolant surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. The
engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
5-29
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
1. You can remove the
coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the
cooling system,
including the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one-quarter of a turn. If you hear a hiss, wait
for that to stop. This will allow any pressure still
left to be vented out the discharge hose.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5-30
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture, to the COLD FILL line.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight.
6. After driving the vehicle, check the level in the
surge tank again when the cooling system has
cooled down.
If the coolant is not at the proper level, repeat Steps 1
through 3 and reinstall the pressure cap. If the coolant is
not at the proper level when the system cools down
again, see your dealer/retailer.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the
COLD FILL line.
5-31
Power Steering Fluid
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
reservoir location.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with
a clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power steering fluid is used in all vehicles with the
3.6L V6 engine. Vehicles with the 3.4L V6 engine have
electric power steering and do not use power steering
fluid.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
5-32
The fluid level should be between the Min (Minimum)
and Max (Maximum) marks when the engine is cold, and
at the Max mark when the engine is hot. If the fluid is
at the Min mark when the engine is cold or hot,
power steering fluid should be added.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Always use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage your
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
your warranty. Always use the correct fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Windshield Washer Fluid
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
What to Use
When you need windshield or rear window washer fluid
be sure to read the instructions before use. If you
will be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
Adding Windshield Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
5-33
Brakes
when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove
brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the
brake hydraulic system.
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake hydraulic system. If
it is, you should have the brake hydraulic system
fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes
will not work well.
It is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid. Adding
brake fluid will not correct a leak. If fluid is added when
the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid
5-34
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it can
spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the
engine is hot enough. You or others could be
burned, and your vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work is done on the
brake hydraulic system.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-33.
What to Add
When you need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake fluid.
Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
Brake Wear
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
hydraulic system, the brakes might not work
well. This could cause a crash. Always use the
proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 5-93.
Your vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time your vehicle is moving, except when you are
pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That could
lead to an accident. When you hear the brake
wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
5-35
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-105.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
5-36
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When you replace parts of the braking system — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might not
work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label.
For battery replacement, see your dealer/retailer or the
service manual. To purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-16.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicle Storage
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-38 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This will help keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of your vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery
or use a battery trickle charger. This will help maintain
the charge of the battery over an extended period
of time.
You must close all doors and the liftgate before
reconnecting the battery. After reconnecting the battery,
you must press the unlock button on the keyless
access transmitter. Failure to follow this procedure could
result in the alarm sounding. Pressing unlock on the
keyless access transmitter will stop the alarm.
5-37
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
5-38
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save your radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations on each vehicle.
You will not need to access your battery for jump
starting. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+)
and a remote negative (−) jump starting terminal
for that purpose.
The remote positive (+) terminal is located under
the engine compartment fuse block cover, and
is marked with a plus (+) symbol on the cover.
To remove the fuse block cover, push in the
two locking tabs located on the rear of the cover,
and lift. To reinstall, fit together the tabs located
on the front of the cover and push down on
the cover until the tabs on the rear of the cover,
click into place.
5-39
3.4L V6 Engine
3.6L V6 Engine
The remote negative (−) terminal is located in the
front of the engine compartment, near the engine
oil dipstick.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on the location of the remote
positive (+) terminal and the engine oil dipstick.
5-40
{CAUTION:
CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause
battery gas to explode. People have been
hurt doing this, and some have been blinded.
Use a flashlight if you need more light.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5-41
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged, too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you will
get a short that would damage the battery and maybe
other parts, too. And do not connect the negative (−)
cable to the negative (−) terminal on the dead battery
because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The other end of the negative (−) cable does
not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
5-42
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) terminal
for this purpose.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Press the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter to disarm your content
theft-deterrent system.
12. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the fuse block cover to its original position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-43
All-Wheel Drive
How to Check Lubricant
If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure to
perform the lubricant checks described in this section.
However, there are two additional systems that
need lubrication.
Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit)
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-12.
5-44
Carrier Assembly-Differential (Rear
Drive Module)
How to Check Lubricant
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
AWD Differential Case for 3.4L V6 Model
A. Fill Plug
B. Drain Plug
5-45
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
AWD Differential Case for 3.6L V6 Model
A. Fill Plug
B. Drain Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
A fluid loss could indicate a problem; check and have it
repaired, if needed.
5-46
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-50.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11
for more information.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
2. Remove the three headlamp assembly attachment
screws.
3. Pull the headlamp assembly toward you to release it
from the hidden, lower headlamp mount. The
headlamp assembly will need to be carefully
disengaged from the vehicle.
5-47
4. Pull the locking tab back on the bulb socket and push
the release tab in to release the wiring harness. Turn
the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from
the headlamp assembly.
5. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
6. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the
socket into the headlamp assembly by turning it
clockwise.
7. Connect the electrical connector.
8. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reinstall the headlamp
assembly. When reinstalling the three headlamp
screws, do not overtighten.
A. Sidemarker Lamp
B. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp
C. Low/High-Beam/DRL Headlamp
5-48
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
A. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Sidemarker Lamp
B. Turn Signal Lamp/Taillamp
C. Backup Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 2-13 for
more information.
2. Remove the taillamp screw covers.
3. Remove the taillamp screws.
4. Pull the taillamp assembly towards you.
5. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to disconnect
it from the taillamp assembly.
6. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
7. Push the new bulb into the bulb socket.
5-49
8. Insert the bulb socket into the taillamp assembly and
turn it clockwise to secure.
9. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the taillamp
assembly. When reinstalling the screws, do not
overtighten.
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Remove the two screws holding each of the license
plate lamps to the liftgate handle.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the license
plate lamp.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-Up, Rear Turn Signal,
Stoplamp and Taillamp
Front and Rear Sidemarker Lamp
Front Turn Signal Lamp
License Plate Lamp
Low/High-Beam Headlamp/DRL
Bulb Number
3157
194
5702A
9421330
H13
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer.
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp down through
the liftgate opening.
5-50
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-14.
2. Push the release lever (B) to disengage the hook
and push the wiper arm (A) out of the blade (C).
3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper
arm until you hear the release lever click into
place.
To replace the rear window wiper blade do the following:
1. Lift the wiper blade arm straight toward you.
2. Push the blade release button and slide the whole
blade to the right to remove.
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly do the
following:
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
3. Install the new blade.
4. Push the wiper blade arm back into place.
5-51
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details.
{CAUTION:
• Poorly maintained and improperly
used tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
flexing. You could have an air-out and
a serious accident. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-22.
CAUTION:
5-52
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-59.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if
your tires have been damaged,
replace them.
See High-Speed Operation on page 5-61
for inflation pressure adjustment for high
speed driving.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’s
width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
5-53
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature resistance. For more
information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on
page 5-72.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire
or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If
your vehicle has a compact spare tire, see
Compact Spare Tire on page 5-88 and If a Tire
Goes Flat on page 5-76.
5-54
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-59.
(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service description. The
letter T as the first character in the tire size means
the tire is for temporary use only.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter
P as the first character in the tire size means
a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
5-55
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as
it is wide.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is
the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a
load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
5-56
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch
(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up
heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-59.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-22.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire, that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1
to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
5-57
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-22.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-59 and Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-22.
5-58
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 5-69.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 5-72.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by
150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-22.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-59
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22. How you load
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-88.
5-60
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial
tires may look properly inflated even when they
are under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
High-Speed Operation
{CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes
excessive heat build up and can cause sudden
tire failure. You could have a crash and you or
others could be killed. Some high-speed rated
tires require inflation pressure adjustment for
high speed operation. When speed limits and
road conditions are such that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure the tires are
rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the vehicle load.
If your vehicle has P235/50R18 size tires, they will
require inflation pressure adjustment when driving your
vehicle at speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher.
Set the cold inflation pressure to the maximum inflation
pressure shown on the tire sidewall, or 35 psi
(241 kPa), whichever is lower. See the example
following. When you end this high-speed driving, return
the tires to the cold tire inflation pressure shown on
the Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-22 and Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-59.
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near
the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum
load 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure for
high-speed driving at 35 psi (241 kPa).
5-61
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The
TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your
vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
5-62
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for
a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-63,
for additional information.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science
Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designed
to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition
exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire
and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel
assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure
in the vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure
readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with RSS-210 of
Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the
low tire pressure warning
light located on the
instrument panel cluster.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
5-63
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light
and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can
be viewed by the driver. For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and displays see
DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-45 and DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-52.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
5-64
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for your
vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-22, for an example of the Tire and
Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle.
Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-59.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 and Tires on page 5-52.
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not covered
by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire sealants.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for
the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
message is also displayed. The low tire warning light
and DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the
conditions that can cause the malfunction light and DIC
message to come on are:
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re-install the road
tire containing the TPMS sensor.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started
but not completed or not completed successfully
after rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light should go off once
the TPMS sensor matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process”
later in this section.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels.
Tires and wheels other than those recommended
for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying New Tires on
page 5-70.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
comes on and stays on.
5-65
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one or
more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on
the tire’s sidewall.
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gage, or a key.
5-66
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes,
to match the first tire and wheel, or more than five
minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions the
matching process stops and you need to start over.
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s
LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for
approximately five seconds. The horn sounds twice
to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the
DIC screen.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
which may take up to 30 seconds to sound,
confirms that the sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and wheel position.
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to
indicate the sensor identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS
sensor matching process is no longer active.
The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC
display screen goes off.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 5-69 for more information.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This
will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate the tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.
Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See
When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-69 and
Wheel Replacement on page 5-74.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
5-67
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-63.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-105.
{CAUTION:
When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire
rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-59 and Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-22.
5-68
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt
off. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76.
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions,
influence when you need new tires.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which appear
when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
Some commercial
truck tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get older,
consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
5-69
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to
meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that
you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This
way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same performance and vehicle
safety, during normal use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake
system performance, ride and handling, traction
control, and tire pressure monitoring performance.
GM’s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire’s
sidewall near the tire size. If the tires have an
all-season tread design, the TPC Spec number will
be followed by an MS for mud and snow. See Tire
Sidewall Labeling on page 5-53 for additional
information.
5-70
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This
is because uniform tread depth on all tires will help
keep your vehicle performing most like it did when
the tires were new. Replacing less than a full set of
tires can affect the braking and handling
performance of your vehicle. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 5-67 for information on
proper tire rotation.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a
crash. Using tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires on all
wheels. It is all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, as it was
developed for use on your vehicle. See
Compact Spare Tire on page 5-88.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make
sure they are the same size, load range, speed
rating, and construction type (radial and
bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
system could give an inaccurate low-pressure
warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed
on your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires
may give a low-pressure warning that is higher or
lower than the proper warning level you would
get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure
Monitor System on page 5-62.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22, for more
information about the Tire and Loading Information
Label and its location on your vehicle.
5-71
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this could
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as anti-lock brakes, rollover
airbags, traction control, and electronic stability control,
the performance of these systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for
your vehicle, and have them properly installed
by a GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 5-70 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.
5-72
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
5-73
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment might need to be checked. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires
and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors
for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76 for more
information.
5-74
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be injured
in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels. If you do find
traction devices that will fit, install them on the
front tires.
5-75
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’s
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6 for more information.
5-76
{CAUTION:
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
The following information tells you how to use the jack
and change a tire.
5-77
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
If your vehicle has the rear compartment storage
panel/cover, you will have to remove it to access the
load floor. See Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover
on page 2-45 for more information.
To access the spare tire and tools:
2. Remove the nut retaining the spare tire.
3. Remove the compact spare tire. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-88 for more information.
4. Locate the jack and wheel wrench, which are
located on the driver’s side of the rear cargo
area, behind an access door. Pull out the access
door to reach them.
1. Lift the load floor up and pull it out of the vehicle
and set it aside.
5-78
5. Remove the wing-bolt
holding the jack and
then remove it.
6. Remove the hook and loop fastener straps holding
the bag containing the wheel wrench. Remove the
wheel wrench from the bag.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
Take off the wheel cover or center cap, if the vehicle
has one, to reach the wheel bolts.
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76 for more
information.
2. Loosen all five plastic
caps by turning the
wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Do
not try to remove
plastic caps from the
cover or center cap.
7. Extend the socket portion of the wrench from the
handle.
3. Pull the cover or center cap away from the wheel.
Store the wheel cover in the cargo area until you
have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
4. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Do not remove them yet.
5-79
5. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack bolt head and
turn the wheel wrench clockwise. That will raise the
lift head a little.
6. Place the jack near the flat tire.
Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head is in the
correct position or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
5-80
7. Find the arrow on the plastic lower body panel.
Position the jack head under the metal jacking
flange and not the plastic lower body panel.
8. Put the compact spare tire near you.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
With the jack head positioned correctly on the metal
jacking flange, it should look like this underneath
the vehicle.
Do not lift the vehicle using the plastic lower body
panel.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
5-81
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
9. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the road tire to
clear the ground.
5-82
10. Remove all of the
wheel nuts.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-76.
11. Remove the flat tire.
12. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
CAUTION:
(Continued)
5-83
13. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
Because the nuts might come loose. The
vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing a crash.
14. Reinstall the wheel nuts. Tighten each nut by hand
until the wheel is held against the hub.
15. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise.
5-84
{CAUTION:
Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nuts
can cause the wheel to come loose and even
come off. This could lead to a crash. If you
have to replace them, be sure to get new
original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-105 for wheel nut
torque specification.
16. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
17. Lower the jack all the way and remove the jack
from under the vehicle.
18. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly with the wheel
wrench.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-105 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
When reinstalling the wheel cover or center cap on the
full-size tire, tighten all five plastic caps hand snug with
the aid of the wheel wrench and tighten them with the
wheel wrench an additional one-quarter of a turn.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle’s
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover
on the compact spare, the cover or the spare could
be damaged.
5-85
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
3. Install the jack in the
left side panel of cargo
area and secure
with the wing bolt.
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
To store the flat or spare tire and tools:
1. Place the wheel wrench into the bag.
2. Use the hook and loop fastener straps to secure
the bag to the fully collapsed jack.
5-86
4. Remove the wheel stow rod from the left side of the
floor compartment.
6. Remove the cap, if your vehicle has one, from the
center of the load floor. Position the rod through the
hole. Replace the rear compartment load floor
over the wheel stow rod through the hole in
the floor.
7. Place the flat, or damaged tire, face down, on the
load floor with the threaded wheel stow rod sticking
up through the center hole of the wheel.
8. Install the nut onto the wheel stow rod and tighten.
9. Install the rear compartment storage panel/cover
in the middle position. See Rear Compartment
Storage Panel/Cover on page 2-45 for more
information.
5. Screw the threaded wheel stow rod onto the spare
tire bracket. The final position of the wheel stow rod
must be turned to the farthest forward position.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon
as you can.
5-87
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop as
soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is correctly
inflated. The compact spare is made to perform well at
speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to
3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and
have the full-size tire repaired or replaced at your
convenience. Of course, it is best to replace the spare
with a full-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tire will
last longer and be in good shape in case it is needed
again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do not
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the
rails. That can damage the tire and wheel, and maybe
other parts of your vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with other
wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the spare tire and
its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
5-88
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
5-89
Fabric/Carpet
Most stains can be removed with club soda water. To
clean, use the following instructions:
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic, and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
Your dealer/retailer has cleaners for the cleaning of
fabric and carpet. They will clean normal spots
and stains very well.
®
If the vehicle has the Ultra Lux suede fabric, follow the
listed procedures except do not use any solvents or
dry cleaning products.
Here are some cleaning tips:
• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
• Clean up stains as soon as you can, before
they set.
• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
• To avoid forming a ring on fabric after spot cleaning,
clean the entire area immediately or it will set.
5-90
1. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft white cloth.
For solids: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum or brush.
2. Apply club soda water to a clean, soft white cloth.
Do not over-saturate; the cloth should not drip
water.
3. Clean the entire area. Avoid getting the fabric
too wet.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry clean, soft white cloth.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. First, try the cleaner in an inconspicuous area to
make sure the cleaner does not affect the color of
the fabric.
2. For liquids: blot the stain with a clean, soft white
cloth.
For solids: remove as much as possible and then
vacuum or brush.
3. Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto a clean,
soft white cloth. Do not apply spray directly to the
fabric.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry clean, soft white cloth.
7. If the cleaner leaves a ring effect, follow up with the
club soda water instructions given earlier in this
section.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee, tea, milk,
fruit, fruit juice, jelly, cheese, chocolate, vomit, urine, and
blood can be removed using the club soda water
instructions given earlier in this section. If an odor lingers
after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a water
and baking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking
soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water. Let dry.
Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleaned with an
approved GM cleaner and a clean, white cloth.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
5-91
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in
a non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
5-92
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on your
vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it states
that it should not be used on plastic parts, do not
use it on your vehicle or damage may occur
and it would not be covered by the warranty.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that
are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on
your vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle
Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-97. Follow all
manufacturers’ directions regarding correct product
usage, necessary safety precautions and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care product.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-93.
5-93
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-97.
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
5-94
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly
when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
Your vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if you do not wash your vehicle after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as
ice and dust. Always wash your vehicle’s chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, you
could damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Use only
approved cleaners on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
5-95
Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
5-96
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Polishing Cloth
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Chrome Wheel Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls
and raised white lettering.
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Description
Swirl Remover Polish
Cleaner Wax
Foaming Tire Shine Low
Gloss
Wash Wax Concentrate
Spot Lifter
Odor Eliminator
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
protects tires. No wiping
necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
5-97
Vehicle Identification
Service Parts Identification Label
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is
very helpful if you ever need to order parts. The label
has the following information:
•
•
•
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. You can see it if you look through
the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code helps you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-105 for your vehicle’s
engine code.
5-98
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage your
vehicle and the damage would not be covered by
your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery, even
if your vehicle is not operating.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-69.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly
reduces the chance of circuit overload and fire caused
by electrical problems.
Your vehicle has an underhood fuse block and an
instrument panel fuse block.
To identify and check fuses, circuit breakers, and relays,
refer to the Fuse Usage Chart on the inside surface
of the fuse panel door.
5-99
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the
passenger side of the center console, to the left of the
glove box near the floor.
Remove the console cover to access the fuse block.
Fuses
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5-100
Usage
Sunroof
Rear Seat Entertainment
Rear Wiper
Liftgate
Airbags
Heated Seats
Driver Side Turn Signal
Door Locks
Automatic Occupant Sensing
Module
Power Mirrors
Fuses
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Usage
Passenger Side Turn Signal
Amplifier
Steering Wheel Illumination
Infotainment
Climate Control System, Remote
Function Actuator
Canister Vent
Radio
Cluster
Ignition Switch
Body Control Module
OnStar®
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp,
Dimmer
Interior Lights
Relays
Usage
RAP RLY
Retained Accessory Power Relay
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger Relay
RLY
Circuit
Breakers
PWR WNDW
PWR SEATS
EMPTY
Misc.
PLR
Usage
Power Windows
Power Seats
Empty
Usage
Fuse Puller
5-101
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver side of the engine compartment.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
5-102
To remove the fuse block cover, push in on the tabs
located on the rear of the cover, and lift. To reinstall, fit
together the tabs located on the front of the cover,
and push down on the cover until the tabs on the rear
of the cover click into place.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
Fuses
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Fuses
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Usage
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 1
Auxiliary Power
Rear HVAC
Spare
Spare
Antilock Brake System
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Usage
Air Conditioning Clutch
Driver Side Low-Beam
Daytime Running Lamp 2
Passenger Side High-Beam
Passenger Side Park Lamp
Horn
Driver Side Park Lamp
Starter
Electronic Throttle Control, Engine
Control Module
Emission Device 1
Even Coils, Injectors
Odd Coils, Injectors
Emission Device 2
Spare
Powertrain Control Module, Ignition
Transmission
Mass Airflow Sensor
Airbag Display
Spare
Stoplamp
Passenger Side Low-Beam
Driver Side High-Beam
Battery Main 3
5-103
Fuses
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
48
49
50
52
5-104
Usage
Spare
Engine Control Module, Battery
Transmission Control Module,
Battery
Trailer Park Lamp
Front Wiper
Driver Side Trailer Stoplamp, Turn
Signal
Spare
Fuel Pump
Not Used
All-Wheel Drive
Regulated Voltage Control
Passenger Side Trailer Stoplamp,
Turn Signal
Spare
Front, Rear Washer
Rear Defogger
Antilock Brake System Motor
Battery Main 2
Daytime Running Lamps
Fuses
53
54
57
63
Usage
Fog Lamps
Climate Control System Blower
Battery Main 1
Electric Power Steering
Relays
31
46
47
51
55
56
Usage
Ignition Main
Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch
Powertrain
Spare
Crank
Fan 1
Passenger Side Trailer Stoplamp,
Turn Signal
Driver Side Trailer Stoplamp, Turn
Signal
Fan 3
Fan 2
Fuel Pump
58
59
60
61
62
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Capacities
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer for more
information.
Cooling System
3.4L V6 Engine
10.5 qt
9.9 L
3.6L V6 Engine
12.5 qt
11.1 L
Engine Oil with Filter
3.4L V6 Engine
4.0 qt
3.8 L
3.6L V6 Engine
5.5 qt
5.2 L
Fuel Tank
Front-Wheel Drive
20.5 gal
77.6 L
All-Wheel Drive
16.6 gal
62.8 L
Transmission Fluid
Automatic 5-Speed AF33 Transmission
4.1 qt
3.9 L
Automatic 6-Speed 6T70 Transmission
9.5 qt
9.0 L
Wheel Nut Torque
100 lb ft
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
5-105
Engine Specifications
5-106
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
3.4L V6
F
Automatic
0.060 in (1.52 mm)
3.6L V6
7
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-2
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-8
At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
At Least Once a Year .....................................6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12
Maintenance Replacement Parts .....................6-14
Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-15
Maintenance Record .....................................6-16
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your
dealer/retailer for details.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might not be covered
by warranty.
6-2
We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will
drive it. You might drive very short distances only a few
times a week. Or you might drive long distances all
the time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive it to
work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-22.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If you have any doubt, see your dealer/retailer
to have a qualified technician do the work. See
Doing Your Own Service Work on page 5-4.
driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your
dealer/retailer do these jobs.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service
needs, you will know that trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine parts.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-16.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it, and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 and Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 6-14. When your vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.
6-3
Scheduled Maintenance
When the change engine oil light and/or CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on, it means
that service is required for your vehicle. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the engine oil life
system may not indicate that vehicle service is
necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil
and filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer
has trained service technicians who will perform this
work using genuine parts and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18 for information on
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
6-4
When the change engine oil light and/or CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message appears, certain services,
checks, and inspections are required. Required
services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it is
recommended that your first service be Maintenance I,
your second service be Maintenance II, and that you
alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.
However, in some cases, Maintenance II may be
required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the
light/message comes on within 10 months since the
vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the light/message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
light/message has not come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-15. Reset oil life system.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18. An Emission Control Service.
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k).
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20. See footnote (l).
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 5-67 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month
on page 6-9.
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
Check engine coolant, power steering fluid (3.6L V6 engine only), and windshield
washer fluid levels and add fluid as needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g).
3.6L V6 Engine Only: Check automatic transmission fluid level and add fluid
as needed.
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j).
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
100,000
(160 000)
125,000
(200 000)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20.
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
(severe service). See footnote (h).
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
(normal service).
•
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control Service.
•
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (m).
•
6-6
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc. Check parking brake adjustment.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you
see anything that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or
frayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checking
the Restraint Systems on page 1-71.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts
or signs of wear. Visually check constant velocity joints,
rubber boots, and axle seals for leaks. With 3.4L V6
engine: Inspect electric power steering cables for proper
hook-up, binding, cracks, chafing, etc. With 3.6L V6
engine: Inspect hydraulic power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch
assemblies, secondary latches, pivots, spring anchor
and release pawl, hood and door hinges, rear folding
seats, and liftgate hinges. More frequent lubrication may
be required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a
clean cloth will make them last longer, seal better, and
not stick or squeak.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the
filter may require replacement more often.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,
if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn
or damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 5-51 and Windshield and Wiper Blades on
page 5-94 for more information.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid if the vehicle is
mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
6-7
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
perform this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-22
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
(j) Check system for interference or binding and for
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that have high effort or
excessive wear.
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate
a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks,
or obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by your warranty.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-15.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can assist you with these
checks and services.
6-8
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-22.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
At Least Once a Month
At Least Once a Year
Tire Inflation Check
Starter Switch Check
Inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-59. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-32.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
6-9
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-32.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately
if the vehicle begins to move.
6-10
when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The ignition key should come out only
in LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
With the engine running and the transmission
in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle
is held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-11
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
Engine Oil
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on
page 5-15.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
®
Engine Coolant water and use only DEX-COOL
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-22.
6-12
Usage
Hydraulic Brake
System
Windshield
Washer
Hydraulic
Power Steering
System (3.6L
V6 engine only)
5-speed
Automatic
Transmission
(3.4L V6
engine only)
6-speed
Automatic
Transmission
(3.6L V6
engine only)
Key Lock
Cylinders
Fluid/Lubricant
Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
Use only T-IV Automatic
Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 88900925, in
Canada 22689186). See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-22.
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Usage
Carrier
Assembly —
Differential
(Rear Drive
Module)
Fluid/Lubricant
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678).
Transfer Case
(Power
Transfer Unit)
With 3.4L V6 engine:
VERSATRAK® Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378514,
in Canada 88901045).
With 3.6L V6 engine: SAE 75W-90
Synthetic Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, in
Canada 89021678) meeting GM
Specification 9986115.
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hood and Door Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hinges, Rear (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Folding Seat Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
6-13
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
3.4L V6 Engine
3.6L V6 Engine
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Replacement Battery
Spark Plugs
3.4L V6 Engine
3.6L V6 Engine
Windshield Wiper Blades
Driver’s Side – 24 inches (60.0 cm)
Passenger’s Side – 19 inches (47.5 cm)
Rear – 15.2 inches (38.6 cm)
6-14
GM Part Number
22676970
ACDelco® Part Number
A1627C
25010792
89017524
15781507
15104967
PF47
PF48
CF137
75-6YR
12568387
12597464
41-101
41-990
22703508
22703507
19120327
—
—
—
Engine Drive Belt Routing
3.6L V6 Engine
3.4L V6 Engine
6-15
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
6-16
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-18
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-4
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ................................7-5
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-5
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-6
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-7
Scheduling Service Appointments ....................7-10
Courtesy Transportation .................................7-10
Collision Damage Repair ................................7-12
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government ....................................7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-16
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .........................................7-16
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-16
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................7-17
Event Data Recorders ...................................7-18
OnStar® ......................................................7-19
Navigation System ........................................7-19
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ..............7-19
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Pontiac. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle
will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., contact the Pontiac Customer Assistance
Center by calling 1-800-762-2737. In Canada, contact
General Motors of Canada Customer Communication
Centre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Pontiac, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you
are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following
the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two,
you should file with the BBB Auto Line Program to
enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You can contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after
following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware
of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration
Program. General Motors of Canada Limited has
committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims.
The program provides for the review of the facts involved
by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute settlement process,
from the time you file your complaint to the final decision,
should be completed in approximately 70 days. We
believe our impartial program offers advantages over
courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick,
and free of charge.
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively, you can call the
General Motors Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or
write to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
7-3
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada (Canada only)
(United States only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
gmcanada.com where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers/retailers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
7-4
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe to
E-News and use tools and forms with greater ease.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gmcanada.com.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Pontiac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can
communicate with Pontiac by dialing: 1-800-833-PONT
(7668). (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Pontiac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to
write or e-mail Pontiac, the letter should be addressed to:
United States — Customer Assistance
Pontiac Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
www.Pontiac.com
1-800-762-2737 or
1-800-833-7668 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
7-5
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma #2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY
users call 1-800-263-3830.
7-6
Roadside Assistance Program
Services Provided
For vehicles purchased in the U.S., call
1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743); (Text telephone (TTY):
1-888-889-2438).
The following services are provided in the U.S. and
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever occurs first, and, in Canada only, up
to a maximum coverage of $100.
For vehicles purchased in Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
As the owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside
Assistance program.
Who is Covered?
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada, a person
driving this vehicle without the consent of the owner
is not eligible for coverage.
vehicle to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 in Canada). In Canada, service
to provide diesel may be restricted. For safety
reasons, propane and other alternative fuels will not
be provided through this service.
• Lock-out Service: Lock-out service is covered at
no charge if you are unable to gain entry into
your vehicle. A remote unlock may be available if
you have an active OnStar® subscription. To ensure
security, the driver must present personal
identification before lock-out service is provided. In
Canada, the vehicle registration is also required.
7-7
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership for warranty
service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling crash.
Winch-out assistance is provided when the vehicle is
mired in sand, mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in good
condition, when equipped and properly inflated, is
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at no
charge if the vehicle does not start.
• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Upon request,
Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,
computer personalized maps, highlighting your
choice of either the most direct route or the most
scenic route to your destination, anywhere in North
America, along with helpful travel information
pertaining to your trip.
Please allow three weeks before your planned
departure date. Trip routing requests will be limited to
six per calendar year.
7-8
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance
(Canada only): In the event of a warranty
related vehicle disablement, while en route and
over 250 kilometres from the original point of
departure, you may qualify for trip interruption
expense assistance. This assistance covers
reasonable reimbursement of up to a maximum of
$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of
$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)
and (C) alternate ground transportation (maximum
of $40/day). This benefit is to assist you with some of
the unplanned expense you may incur while waiting
for your vehicle to be repaired.
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts and a
copy of the repair order are required.
Once authorization has been given, your advisor will
help you make any necessary arrangements and
explain how to claim for trip interruption expense
assistance.
• Alternative Service (Canada only): There may be
times, when Roadside Assistance cannot provide
timely assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to
secure local emergency road service, and you will be
reimbursed up to $100 upon submission of the
original receipt to Roadside Assistance.
In many instances, mechanical failures may be covered.
However, any cost for parts and labor for non-warranty
repairs are the responsibility of the driver.
Pontiac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or reimbursement to an
owner or driver when, in their sole discretion, the claims
become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.
Calling For Assistance
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles operated on
a non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound towing
caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State,
Provincial, or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting or
changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Pontiac and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Assistance program at any time without
notification.
number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
7-9
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer/retailer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty
in both the U.S. and Canada.
7-10
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you with
shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes one-way
or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time and
distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported
by original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement
for reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by
original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight warranty
repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited and must be
supported by original receipts. This requires that you sign
and complete a rental agreement and meet state/
provincial, local, and rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include minimum age
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You
are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive
mileage, or rental usage beyond the completion of
the repair.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
7-11
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,
have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using
the proper equipment and quality replacement parts.
Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your vehicle’s
resale value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used
for repair. These parts are typically removed from
vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes. In most
cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged
sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment
GM part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
7-12
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not
have been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these
parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are
not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts
are not covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
If a Crash Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts. If such insurance
coverage is not available from your current insurance
carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all
right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else
in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle
only if its position puts you in danger or you are
instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash. Do
not discuss your personal condition, mental frame of
mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will
help guard against post-crash legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-7 for more information.
7-13
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
7-14
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM
parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay
the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Service Manuals
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-762-2737, or write:
Pontiac Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-16
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins’ give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission performance, to monitor
the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy
airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle.
These modules may store data to help your
dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some
modules may also store data about how you operate the
vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average
speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s
personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat
positions, and temperature settings.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-17
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
7-18
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by
law. Data that GM collects or receives may also be used
for GM research needs or may be made available to
others for research purposes, where a need is shown
and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner.
OnStar®
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and
use. See also OnStar® System on page 2-39 in this
manual for more information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
7-19
✍ NOTES
7-20
A
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-70
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-99
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-20
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-20
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-30
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-29
Airbag System ................................................ 1-56
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-63
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-61
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-59
Airbag Systems
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-70
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-62
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-64
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-69
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-62
All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-44
All-Wheel Drive Disabled Light .......................... 3-42
All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System ........................... 4-8
All-Wheel-Drive Service Light ............................ 3-42
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 4-5
Antilock Brake, System Warning Light ................ 3-34
Appearance Care
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 5-95
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-92
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-96
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-93
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-90
Finish Care ................................................. 5-94
Finish Damage ............................................ 5-96
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ................................................. 5-92
Interior Cleaning .......................................... 5-88
Leather ...................................................... 5-91
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-96
Tires .......................................................... 5-96
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-96
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-97
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-93
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-92
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-94
Appointments, Scheduling Service ..................... 7-10
Ashtray ......................................................... 3-20
Audio System ................................................. 3-67
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-110
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual ................................................. 3-101
Radio Reception ........................................ 3-111
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-68
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-110
1
Audio System(s) .............................................
Automatic Headlamp System ............................
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ........................................... 2-25,
3-71
3-15
5-22
2-28
B
Battery .......................................................... 5-37
Electric Power Management .......................... 3-18
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-19
Brake
Emergencies ................................................ 4-6
Brakes .......................................................... 5-34
System Warning Light .................................. 3-33
Braking ........................................................... 4-4
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-6
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-20
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-47
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-47
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-46
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps .................................. 5-47
License Plate Lamps .................................... 5-50
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-50
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ........................................ 5-49
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-70
2
C
Calibration ..................................................... 3-49
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ....... 5-4
California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-4
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-105
Carbon Monoxide ........................... 2-36, 4-18, 4-32
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-92
Cargo Lamp ................................................... 3-18
CD, MP3 ............................................... 3-90, 3-95
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-43
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-75
Charging System Light .................................... 3-32
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-36
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-96
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-37
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-34
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 1-42
Older Children ............................................. 1-31
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position .................................................. 1-50
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ........................................... 1-52
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-40
Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-20
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 5-95
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. 5-93
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-90
Finish Care ................................................. 5-94
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ................................................. 5-92
Interior ....................................................... 5-88
Leather ...................................................... 5-91
Tires .......................................................... 5-96
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-96
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-93
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-92
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-94
Climate Control System ................................... 3-20
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-24
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-24
Clock ............................................................ 3-68
Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-12
Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-88
Compass ....................................................... 3-49
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-18
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-4
Convenience Net ............................................ 2-48
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-35
Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-35
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-23
Cooling System .............................................. 5-27
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-11
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-41
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-43
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation ................................ 7-10
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ....................................................... 7-5
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-5
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-6
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................ 7-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government ................................... 7-15
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-7
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-16
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-15
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Delayed Locking ............................................. 2-12
DIC Compass ................................................. 3-49
Disc, MP3 ............................................. 3-90, 3-95
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-17
3
Door
Ajar Light ................................................... 3-43
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-12
Locks ........................................................ 2-11
Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-11
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-12
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
Driver
Seat Height Adjuster ...................................... 1-3
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-45
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-45
DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-60
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-52
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-14
Before a Long Trip ...................................... 4-16
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-3
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-16
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-17
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-15
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-22
Winter ........................................................ 4-18
DVD
Rear Seat Entertainment System .................. 3-101
4
E
EDR ............................................................. 7-17
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-99
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................. 5-102
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-99
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-100
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-99
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-20
Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-40
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-36
Coolant ...................................................... 5-22
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-23
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-35
Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................ 3-35
Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-15
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-36
Oil ............................................................. 5-15
Oil Life System ........................................... 5-18
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 5-26
Overheating ................................................ 5-25
Reduced Power Light ................................... 3-41
Running While Parked .................................. 2-36
Starting ...................................................... 2-22
Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-17
Event Data Recorders ..................................... 7-18
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-30
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-20
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-96
Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-6
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-76
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-76
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-86
Fluid ............................................................. 5-22
Power Steering ........................................... 5-32
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-33
Fog Lamp
Fog ........................................................... 3-16
Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-40
Folding Rear Seat ........................................... 1-10
Folding Seatback, Passenger ............................. 1-8
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Filling the Tank ............................................. 5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-43
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-6
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-44
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................. 5-102
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-99
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-100
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-99
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-35
Fuel .......................................................... 3-43
Speedometer .............................................. 3-28
Tachometer ................................................. 3-28
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-6
Gate Ajar Light ............................................... 3-42
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-43
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-6
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-7
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 5-46
5
Headlamps .................................................... 3-14
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-47
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-15
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-47
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps .................................. 5-47
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
On Reminder .............................................. 3-14
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-4
Heater ........................................................... 3-20
Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................... 1-3
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-41
High-Speed Operation, Tires ............................. 5-61
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-16
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-17
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-17
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-21
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-34
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-59
6
Instrument Panel
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness .................................................. 3-16
Cluster ....................................................... 3-27
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-38
K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4
Keys ............................................................... 2-3
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall .....................................
Lamps
Cargo ........................................................
Dome ........................................................
Map ..........................................................
Lap-Shoulder Belt ...........................................
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
License Plate Lamps .......................................
5-53
3-18
3-17
3-17
1-25
1-42
5-50
Liftgate
Carbon Monoxide ........................................
Light
Airbag Readiness ........................................
All-Wheel Drive Disabled ..............................
Antilock Brake System Warning .....................
Brake System Warning .................................
Change Engine Oil ......................................
Charging System .........................................
Cruise Control .............................................
Door Ajar ...................................................
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning .............
Fog Lamp ..................................................
Gate Ajar ...................................................
Highbeam On .............................................
Low Fuel Warning .......................................
Malfunction Indicator ....................................
Oil Pressure ...............................................
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................
Reduced Engine Power ................................
Safety Belt Reminders ..................................
Security .....................................................
Service All-Wheel-Drive ................................
Service Vehicle Soon ...................................
TCS Warning Light ......................................
Tire Pressure ..............................................
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning ..........
2-13
3-29
3-42
3-34
3-33
3-40
3-32
3-41
3-43
3-35
3-40
3-42
3-41
3-44
3-36
3-39
3-30
3-41
3-28
3-40
3-42
3-43
3-34
3-36
3-34
Lighting
Entry ......................................................... 3-17
Lights ............................................................ 3-14
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
On Reminder .............................................. 3-14
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-22
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-13
Locks
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-12
Door .......................................................... 2-11
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-13
Power Door ................................................ 2-11
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-12
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-12
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-44
Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-43
Lumbar
Manual Controls ............................................ 1-4
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-8
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
7
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
At Least Once a Year .................................... 6-9
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-16
Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 6-14
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using .......................................................... 6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-36
Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-4
Manual Reclining Seatbacks ............................... 1-5
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2
Manual, Using .................................................... iii
Map Lamps .................................................... 3-17
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-52
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar® ..... 2-38
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-37
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ............. 2-37
Outside Convex Mirrors ................................ 2-39
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-38
MP3 ..................................................... 3-90, 3-95
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-4
8
N
Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-19
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual ..................................................... 3-101
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-20
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-28
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-28
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-12
Oil
Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-40
Engine ....................................................... 5-15
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-39
Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-18
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-31
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-4
OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 7-19
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-39
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-24
Outlets
Accessory Power ......................................... 3-19
Outside
Convex Mirrors ............................................ 2-39
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-38
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode .......................................... 5-26
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
P
Paint, Damage ............................................... 5-96
Park Brake .................................................... 2-32
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-33
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-35
Parking
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-35
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-30
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-24
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-64
Passing ......................................................... 4-12
PASS-Key® III+ .............................................. 2-18
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ................................ 2-19
Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California ...... 5-4
Power
Door Locks ................................................. 2-11
Reduced Engine Light .................................. 3-41
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-22
Seat ............................................................ 1-3
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-32
Windows .................................................... 2-16
Privacy ..........................................................
Event Data Recorders ..................................
Navigation System .......................................
OnStar .......................................................
Radio Frequency Identification .......................
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .................
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-19
7-19
2-12
R
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID), Privacy .... 7-19
Radios .......................................................... 3-67
Radio(s) ........................................................ 3-71
Radios
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual ................................................. 3-101
Reception ................................................. 3-111
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-68
Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-110
Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover ............ 2-45
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-12
Rear Seat Armrest .......................................... 2-46
Rear Seat Entertainment System ..................... 3-101
Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper ......................... 3-11
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
OnStar® ..................................................... 2-38
Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ........................... 2-37
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-37
9
Reclining Seatbacks, Manual .............................. 1-5
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-27
Reduced Engine Power Light ............................ 3-41
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 2-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,
Operation ..................................................... 2-5
Remote Vehicle Start ........................................ 2-8
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare
Tire ........................................................... 5-79
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-78
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-50
Replacement Parts, Maintenance ...................... 6-14
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-16
General Motors ........................................... 7-16
United States Government ............................ 7-15
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-71
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash .................................................. 1-72
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-22
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-7
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-22
Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-15
Running the Engine While Parked ..................... 2-36
10
S
Safety Belt
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-28
Safety Belts
Care of ...................................................... 5-92
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-17
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-25
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-30
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-30
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-12
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seatback, Folding Passenger ............................. 1-8
Seats
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ............................. 1-3
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-7
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-4
Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-4
Manual Reclining Seatbacks ........................... 1-5
Passenger Folding Seatback ........................... 1-8
Power Seat .................................................. 1-3
Split Folding Rear Seat ................................ 1-10
Securing a Child Restraint
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-50
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-52
Security Light ................................................. 3-40
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ..................................................... 5-5
All-Wheel-Drive Light .................................... 3-42
California Pershlorate Materials
Requirements ............................................ 5-4
California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 5-4
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-36
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-16
Vehicle Soon Light ....................................... 3-43
Service, Scheduling Appointments ..................... 7-10
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-69
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-96
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-33
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-35
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8
Spare Tire
Compact .................................................... 5-88
Installing .................................................... 5-79
Removing ................................................... 5-78
Storing ....................................................... 5-86
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-105
Speedometer .................................................. 3-28
Split Folding Rear Seat .................................... 1-10
StabiliTrak® System .......................................... 4-7
Start Vehicle, Remote ....................................... 2-8
Starting the Engine ......................................... 2-22
Steering .......................................................... 4-9
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-110
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-7
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-43
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-48
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-43
Glove Box .................................................. 2-43
Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-43
Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover ......... 2-45
Rear Seat Armrest ....................................... 2-46
Table ......................................................... 2-47
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-21
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-17
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-48
11
T
Table ............................................................ 2-47
Tachometer .................................................... 3-28
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps .... 5-49
TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-34
Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................... 3-110
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-17
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-18
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-18
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ............................. 2-19
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-7
Time, Setting .................................................. 3-68
Tire
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-36
Tires ............................................................. 5-52
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Cleaning ................................................. 5-95
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-70
Chains ....................................................... 5-75
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-76
Cleaning .................................................... 5-96
Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-88
Different Size .............................................. 5-72
High-Speed Operation .................................. 5-61
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-76
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-59
12
Tires (cont.)
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-67
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-79
Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-63
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-62
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-79
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-78
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-86
Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 5-53
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-56
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-72
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-74
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-74
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-69
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-27
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-32
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-27
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-6
Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-34
StabiliTrak® System ....................................... 4-7
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-22
Transmission Operation, Automatic ............ 2-25, 2-28
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-28
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
U
W
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-72
Using this Manual ............................................... iii
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-26
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-52
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-74
Different Size .............................................. 5-72
Replacement ............................................... 5-74
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-40
Windows ....................................................... 2-15
Power ........................................................ 2-16
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-4
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-22
Service Soon Light ...................................... 3-43
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-17
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-98
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-98
Vehicle Personalization
DIC ........................................................... 3-60
Vehicle, Remote Start ....................................... 2-8
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-24
Visors ........................................................... 2-17
13
Windshield
Washer ...................................................... 3-10
Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-33
Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-51
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-94
Wiper Fuses ............................................... 5-99
Wipers ......................................................... 3-9
Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ........................ 3-11
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-18
14
X
XM Radio Messages ..................................... 3-100
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
Download PDF

advertising